Here at Men’s Gear, our team believes that gadgets have become an essential part of daily life. Advancements in technology have given us even more control over the tasks that…
The post 65+ Coolest Gadgets for Men appeared first on Men's Gear.
C
offee. The magic bean that is the favorite pick me up of millions. Essential to kick start the brain in the morning and the perfect ending to a meal. Brewed to perfection in countless variations, it brings people together and keeps a body going through busy days and long sleepless nights. Take what you want from me but mess with my coffee and there will be trouble.
The coffee bean is complex containing a thousand plus compounds that carry its unique flavors and aromas. It demands careful brewing with cautious temperature and time control to get it just right – something around 195 -205 degrees for 6-8 minutes. It is the most intense flavors and aromas that are the first to leave the bean, the milder and smoother follow later.
Every serious coffee drinker is a serious coffee maker and knows that straying from the formula leaves a bitter taste in the mouth. Too slow or with the temperature too high the humble bean lets you know with a brew that is harsh, bitter and hard to swallow. Too cold and the flavor is never extracted and there is no delicious aroma filling the kitchen. Brewing a fresh pot of coffee that hits all the right nerves is an art form that has to be learnt and using a good machine from the start is a must to get even a chance of the perfect brew.
The coffee machine is a blessing for people with high coffee consumption. Some of us are unable to start the day or an important task without a cup of coffee at hand. Other people find their breakfast and snack incomplete without a cup of aromatic coffee. For those coffee lovers and addicts, the coffee machine is essential.
The coffee machine is beneficial in these ways;
Time and Money Saver
A good coffee machine saves time and money. No need to be spending precious time standing in coffee shop queues for your favorite brew when you can prepare it for less cost at home. A good quality machine needs to be viewed as an investment. Brewing at home will always come in cheaper than the coffee shop and the machine will easily pay for itself. Even so, it pays to look out for machines on sales to add to the amount of cash you can save.
Fresher and More Flavorful Coffee
Nothing can beat the flavor and aroma of freshly brewed coffee and you can get it at home only with a quality coffee maker. Instant coffee is an easier choice but its taste and aroma cannot be compared with freshly prepared coffee from the beans. It has a distinct aroma and flavor easily distinguished by a coffee lover. For some though, it’s all too intense. They prefer mild and less aromatic instant coffee to freshly brewed one. It all depends upon your own taste buds.
Healthier Version of Coffee
Brewed coffee is the healthier version of coffee. Coffee beans release greater amounts of the healthy oils into the pot which are beneficial for your health. These oils contain antioxidants and nutrients that are helpful in uplifting mood and increasing brain activity. Brewed coffee deliver these nutrients in their purest form and help protect the body from various cancer types and heart disease. Instant coffee does not carry as much benefit as the nutrients and the antioxidants present are not as effective after it has been commercially prepared. Beware though, even with its health benefits, coffee is still an addictive stimulant and over-consumption can create problems.
A cup of coffee can lift your mood and enhance brain activity and if it is freshly brewed its benefit increases multifold. What could be a better way to improve your employees` concentration span and increase their productivity than to offer them a freshly brewed coffee any time they want?
Bringing a coffee machine into your office will win the heart of your employees and make your workplace a more cozy and attractive place for your workers. It says you value your employees but also eliminates the need for frequent coffee breaks. Ready and on tap, fresh coffee can eliminate a lazy and lethargic work attitude to leave your workers more enthusiastic and active.
Your investment in a good coffee machine for your office will go a long way in not only invigorating your employees but also impressing your clients. The social act of presenting an aromatic cup of freshly brewed coffee will lift the mood of your clients, relax them and help you cut a good deal.
Before you decide to make the all important purchase, you need to learn a bit about different types of coffee machines and some of their major benefits and features. For instance:
Drip Coffee Makers
Drip coffee machines are the most popular coffee machines and are widely used for domestic purposes. They are easy to use and can be operated by anyone. These standard machines are also cost effective and are available everywhere.
Here are some of the main features of drip coffee machines:
Espresso Coffee Machines
An espresso coffee machine is your ideal choice if you are a lover of concentrated more intense espresso coffee. This coffee is the base of many high-end coffees served at the cafes around the world. You can easily get your tricky espresso coffee right from the comfort of your home with this machine.
Some of the prominent aspects of espresso coffee machine are:
French Presses
The French press is a classic model of coffee machine and popular around the world. It is unique with zero electric consumption and a simple mechanism. They are the cheapest type of coffee makers available in the market and require the least maintenance.
Some of the key features of the French press are:
Single Cup Makers
Single cup makers are ideal for individual use or in the situation where everyone prefers different flavors and wants to brew at their own convenient timings. These machines work with a single cup coffee pod and have both filter and grounder attach to it.
Some of the important attributes of single cup makers are:
Bean-to-Cup Coffee Makers
If you are a true coffee maniac than the bean to cup coffee machine is your ideal choice. It grounds whole coffee beans right at the moment you begin to brew to ensure there are no flavors lost and the essential oils released are at their optimal best for a rich aroma and full bodied taste.
Some of the key aspects of bean to cup coffee makers are:
Considering the benefits, you may already be feeling tempted to buy yourself a new shiny piece of coffee maker. You should certainly go ahead, but be sure to remember a few important points before taking the plunge. Here is what you should consider when buying a coffee machine.
Bar Pressure
Good bar pressure is essential for getting creamy frothy coffee from your coffee maker. Check out the bar pressure before buying any coffee maker. Ideal bar pressure is between 15 to 19 bar and is crucial for brewing perfect frothy coffee. Optimum bar pressure is even more essential for espresso coffee making machines.
Thermo Block
The temperature of water at the time of coffee brewing plays an important role in getting perfectly flavored coffee. Thermo block is a boiler in your coffee machine that ensures perfect water temperature for brewing. Your water temperature should ideally be maintained at 90-degree centigrade for a perfect cup or else it will ruin the flavor and aroma balance of your coffee.
Filter Holder
The filter holder maintains the temperature of grounded coffee. A brass filter holder is better than aluminum filter holder as it retains heat more precisely.
Wattage
Wattage helps in brewing the coffee quickly by boiling water in comparatively lesser time. Higher wattage indicates the efficiency of the machine to boil water swiftly.
Maintenance
Your coffee maker demands your attention and regular maintenance to keep working efficiently. If you want to make the most of your coffee maker and want it to stay fault free for a longer than you must descale them regularly. Some high-end machines have indicators that alert you to descale when needed. Besides descaling, check the filters regularly for any blockage and wash your water reservoir, spout and pot after every use.
Features to Check in Different Types of Coffee Makers
There are different coffee makers to suit different tastes and needs, so it is important to consider certain features when you want to put your money on a specific type of machine. Here are a few things to consider.
Multi-Cup Coffee Makers
Popular among most American households, the drip coffee makers can easily make at least 8-10 cups per carafe, which is why they are perfect for small dinner parties and homes with multiple coffee drinkers. To make your perfect purchase it pays to think about a few things.
There are other features to check out, such as a built-in coffee grinder, pause function, automatic shut-off and the availability of filter basket.
Single Serve Coffee Makers
These coffee makers help you brew a single cup of coffee at a time and are quite popular these days. By going for these machines, you will be able to enjoy the luxury of drinking perfect coffee with very little cleanup. These makers use pre-packaged pods that you can find a variety of flavors. With these pods, it is easy to change your routine with a cup of hot chocolate, tea, or even hot cider. Here’s what to consider when buying these coffee makers:
Espresso Machines
It is easy to use espresso machines and create a perfect shot of espresso that can be used as the base for cappuccino, caffe latte, Americano, mocha, macchiato, and so many more variations. Considering these features will help you buy the right espresso machine for you.
Invest in an espresso machine with a built-in frothing wand. These wands produce a stream of hot air to help aerate milk and give you that lovely foamy topping on your morning cappuccino.
When you know what to consider at the time of buying a coffee machine, you usually don’t need to worry too much about brands. Nevertheless, knowing about popular brands will make it easier to select a coffee machine that is capable of delivering the best performance in your home or office setting.
Hamilton Beach is a nice choice with a variety of coffee machines available to choose from, but if you’re looking for coffee machines that last, you may want to buy something from Krups. Similarly, Keurig offers excellent machines, but they may be a bit expensive to buy for some. To find a rater affordable model, you can check the range of coffee makers Mr. Coffee has available.
Other than these, there are many other popular brands of coffee machine, including De’ Longhi, Nespresso, Melitta, Presto, Kenmore, Black & Decker, NESCO, and the list goes on. Just be sure to know your exact coffee needs and remember the points mentioned earlier to get the best machine.
This single serve coffee maker from Hamilton Beach allows you to brew your coffee in two ways. It comes equipped with a 12-cup glass carafe but you can also brew your coffee directly into your travel mug. By the way, you’re not going to find the travel mug included in the package.
This 950W machine works flawlessly. The pod holder works efficiently with the brew basket to hold soft pods, which is nice. Another good thing is that you can easily select different brew strengths to brew bold or regular strength coffee. The availability of a control panel and display means you can automate the process and even set the brewing time 24 hours in advance.
Keep in mind that the single serve feature works when you use loosely ground coffee or opt for disk-shaped soft pods. It does not work with K-Cup packs, which may be a drawback of buying this machine. Another issue is that it lacks a permanent mesh filter, which is usually available on the carafe side.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
This 12-cup coffee maker from Mr. Coffee is available in black and looks good in every kitchen setting. You will notice that the machine brews at a reasonably fast speed, and you can use it to brew your coffee at a rather hot temperature. When pouring out of the pot, you don’t have to deal with a dribbling carafe, which is a common complaint of many coffee lovers.
Thanks to the on/0ff indicator light, it is easy to check whether your coffee maker is working or not. Interestingly, it is possible to pause the brewing process before it is done using Grab-A-Cup Auto Pause feature. Similarly, you will love the fact that it comes with a dual water window, which offers enough visibility to ensure you don’t have to deal with overflows.
Moreover, the machine allows for easy cleanups because all you have to do is lift the filter basket and clean it. It works great, but the only issue is that it may be a bit expensive, especially for someone who’s coming from a basic coffee maker.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
So many things make Keurig K-Café a good choice for anyone interested in buying a single serve coffee maker. One of the best things is that you can use it with any K-cup pod, which means it is possible to make cappuccinos and brew coffee with utmost ease. All you have to do is press the “SHOT” button and it will brew coffee using your favorite K-Cup pod. With its large 60oz water reservoir, you can easily brew up to 6 cups.
The build quality of this machine is impressive, and it is easy to set it up after you receive the package. The use of simple button controls means it is easy to operate right out of the box. Interestingly, there is no need to worry about serious maintenance because it comes equipped with dishwasher safe frother. A really nice single-serve machine, but the price may be a bit on the higher side.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
Available in 17 amazing colors, the KBG coffee brewer is a simple to use and reasonably quiet machine you can own. The build quality is impressive, as the machine is encased in a highly durable metal housing.
You don’t have to worry about any dripping issues, as it features an auto drip-stop brew-basket coupled with a high quality glass carafe, which ensures coffee quality, taste, and integrity. Interestingly, it is a powerful coffee brewer with a capacity to brew a full carafe in no more than 6 minutes.
With its 9-hole outlet arm, it is capable of pulsing water at up to 205F, which in turn will ensure a smooth and evenly extracted cup of coffee. While most of the features are super impressive, the price may be a deal-breaker for some, as this brewer does come with a hefty price tag.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The K575 from Keurig is a reasonably good single serve coffee maker that is strong enough to handle a K-cup pod brew up to 12oz. The availability of a large 80oz water reservoir means you can brew up to 10 cups before even thinking of going for a refill. You can easily change the strength setting to brew a cup of coffee as per your unique needs and taste. “Hot Water On Demand” is a nice feature too, making it easier to brew your coffee with a touch of the button.
Another good thing about this coffee maker is that you can easily adjust the size of your beverage. Interestingly, the brewer works automatically and switches to the optimized brew setting after sensing the type of pack you have inserted into it. You can also change the settings using the color touchscreen, which, by the way, is larger than what you usually find on other coffee makers in the market. The price may be the only issue making you think twice before buying it.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
Keurig seems to have designed some of the nicest coffee makers available in the market, and the K-Elite Single Serve is no different. One of its important selling points is the use of quite brew technology, which means the machine will not make any noise while in use, so you can use it late at night or very early in the morning without disturbing others around you.
The coffee maker is quite powerful and gives you the chance to change its strength settings with ease. You can also switch to iced setting to brew a cup of iced coffee in no time. With ‘hot water on demand’ feature, you can get the amount of water you need to prepare instant oatmeal, soups, and more. And, it will take some time until your water supply runs dry, as the machine comes with a large 75oz water reservoir.
Everything about the K-Elite is good, but you’ll be disappointed to know that it does not come with a touchscreen. Moreover, the reservoir lid is no longer hinged, which means you cannot lift the front half only to refill. It is certainly a simpler product, but it does increase the reliability to a certain extent.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
With two capsules that let you prepare Coffee, Alto, and Espresso, this coffee machine bundle really looks like a good buy. There is a large capsule for coffee and alto, with cup sizes of 8oz and 14oz respectively, and a small capsule for espresso. Coffee lovers will love it for producing multiple cups of coffee with optimal freshness.
The real upside of buying this machine is that it uses the Centrifusion extraction technology that spins the capsules up to 7,000 RPM for a perfect blend of water and coffee. You will love the crema it produces. It also works amazingly well to produce authentic espresso, and does it quickly too.
It supports one-touch brewing, so you will love the ease of use. The only downside is that the pods are quite expensive, much more than what you pay when you use another brand. You won’t find a glitch in the performance though.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
You will love the Optimal Brew coffee maker for its design, performance, and build quality. The combination of a fast brew speed and a high brew temperature that goes as high as 205 degrees means you get great tasting coffee cup after cup.
With the Optimal Brew coffee maker, you don’t have to wait for the brewing cycle to complete to pour a cup. Simply use its Pause ‘N Serve function to pour a cup as you like. It uses a special cleaning cycle along with impressive water filtration system to provide you with better tasting coffee. Its removal water reservoir is another nice feature.
You will find it quite easy and safe to use, especially because it has a stainless steel thermal carafe. Moreover, you can take advantage of its built-in timer to get fresh coffee whenever you want. It means that if you can afford it, you should certainly consider buying it.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The BrewSense Drip Coffee Maker from Braun is a good choice for making rich, reliable coffee in no time. Yes, your brewing knowledge matters, but this feature-rich machine will simplify the task with its PureFlavor system that works flawlessly to extract the finest coffee flavor.
It makes no compromises over flavor and its unique carafe lid plays a role in it. It kind of seals the flavor inside your coffee by limiting the air exposure. Moreover, you can change the settings using the strength function to make bold or regular coffee.
Thanks to its anti-drip system, you will not find it difficult to pour your coffee with precision, even when you want to do it right in the middle of the brewing cycle. It serves you well as a whole, but some people have complained about a black coating building on the heating plate.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The Kenmore 40706 is a popular coffee maker that comes with a 12-cup glass carafe making it easier to get the right amount of water as per your brewing needs. It is an extremely easy-t0-use coffee maker with a programmable timer. You can also use its Pause and Serve function to get a cup during the brew cycle.
Unlike many other coffee makers, this one from Kenmore will not have issues related to the heating plate. It comes equipped with a non-stick coated plate, so you will have your coffee warm longer. The brewing mechanism works efficiently, thanks to the use of an improved brewing technology that lets the grounds steep thoroughly before making it available in the carafe.
It is worth mentioning that though the overall build quality of the Kenmore 40706 is reasonably good, the design is not as user-friendly as some other models from Kenwood are. For instance, it is hard to empty the pot because of its inner rim and it is not possible to open up the reservoir cover completely. If you can ignore these seemingly minor issues, this coffee maker may prove to be a good buy.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
Black + Decker has a good range of coffee makers and the DCM600B is one of their popular models. With its Duralife glass carafe, it is extremely easy to fill it up and pour once your coffee is ready. You will really like the fact that the carafe comes with clear measurement markings making life a lot easier if you have multiple coffee drinkers who like different flavor strengths.
The presence of a removal filter basket means that you don’t have to go through much hassle to clean it up. It is dishwasher safe, so you don’t have to worry about anything. It is worth mentioning that the basket is quite compatible with different basket-style paper filters. Other features include a nonstick carafe plate, an easy-view water window, a lighted on/off switch, and more. The only issue is that you may have to deal with some dripping, and therefore, it is better to have something to catch that dripping coffee.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
This coffee maker with five brew sizes is quite compatible with 1.0 and 2.0 K-cups as well as number of other pods, which means that you can make a cup of coffee in any way you like. You will also notice the same versatility in brew sizes, as you can choose different strengths and brew up to 12oz cups.
It comes with a 45oz water tank, which is removable by the way, but you may find it a bit on the smaller side as many other modes offer water tanks up to 80oz. Still, the size is reasonably good and you will appreciate the fact that it has a large opening that makes it easier to fill it up.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
When you’re a coffee lover, it makes great sense to own a coffee maker, as it helps you prepare coffee in an affordable way and allows you to find the perfect settings to have a cup of foamy coffee. Many top brands are now selling some amazingly designed coffee makers, but you should consider your budget and the number of cups you’d be brewing a day. So, be ready to do your research to bring home a coffee maker perfectly designed to suit your unique needs!
MIDI controller is music management device to be coupled with software or computers. It can be used to produce music, remix existing tracks or make modifications to a particular soundtrack.
But before we go into what these things are and why you should be interested in them, let’s address the acronym. MIDI stands for Musical Instrument Digital Interface, and is an industry-standard protocol that’s been around for like 25 years or so.
Earlier, MIDI was used to connect up all sorts of external hardware boxes (synths, sequencers, samplers and the like), but if you’re new to computer music, or if you’re really just only interested in tweaking your music on your computer, all you really need to know is that it enables you to send input information directly from your controller to your computer. That’s a pretty big thing actually, and this is why.
A MIDI controller is a keyboard or control panel that might look like a synthesizer or a drum machine among others, but it doesn’t have any sounds of its own. It sends MIDI data, usually to a computer, which will then generate sounds on a software instrument or an external hardware instrument. Essentially, a MIDI controller triggers other devices to make sounds. Using a MIDI controller, you have the possibility of modifying or producing your music in an endless number of ways.
You must remember that sounds created using a MIDI controller are saved as a MIDI file and this often requires proprietary software to convert to mp3 or alter the sounds in a sound mixing software. However, most MIDI controllers made by established brands come bundled with downloadable proprietary software that have a ton features and native sounds along with conversion features built in. MIDI controllers are traditionally made to be using alongside computers and can be rarely, if ever used as standalone music production devices.
You’ll need to make a list of the features you can’t do without, USB power and plug and play functionality for example. Also whether you’re going be carrying it around a lot or just place it in your studio, portability is a big deal for some MIDI controllers. Things of course, also depend on what time of music you’re looking to make and that is discussed in detail below.
MIDI controllers in simple terms, act as a medium to produce music through software on a computer. This also opens up the possibility of using dedicated software to create very specific types of music. But there are also MIDI controllers which are better suited to specific types of music and are easier to work if you’re producing those kinds of music. These come with bundled with dedicated software specialised to work with a specific music genre.
For example, drum pad MIDI controllers are best suited to create EDM or a Hip-Hop tracks and come with special software that makes creating EDM and Hip-Hop music easier and smoother. You can also download other supporting MIDI controller software online which might again be inclined towards working within a specific genre. The possibilities are endless, really.
Yes and no, many MIDI controllers are USB powered with plug and play functionality and these are fairly quite easy to set up. You might want to look for class-complaint MIDI controllers that usually require no drivers to be installed. The more advance controllers however, do require a steep learning curve and quite a lot of tweaking and software integrating to get to the point where you’ll be able to create the music you want. But setting up these is fun too, especially after you’ve become skilled enough to try the more advanced music production tech out there.
Our list of the best MIDI controllers should be enough to get you started and then some more.
The Maschine Mk3 is a state of the art drum controller that is certainly the next-generation in music production and performance. The MK3 controller is a fast, intuitive, and fun way to create and perfect tracks and beats. It has an integrated hardware/software system that includes a sampler, arranger, mixer, FX, audio interface and much more.
It has two high-resolution colour screens that makes it easy to slice samples, browse and preview sounds, tweak FX and mix and edit your projects. MASCHINE’s Smart Strip can be used like a pitch wheel to bend sounds, experiment with perform FX, or strum sounds like a guitar. Your music will sound just like how you want it to, up to the minutest detail.
The Maschine Mk3 is also among the most convenient MIDI controllers that you can buy. There’s 8 touch sensitive knobs for precision sound-engineering. It is also USB-powered and packed with a built-in, pro-grade 96 kHz / 24-bit audio interface, you can record, play, and perform from literally anywhere. Furthermore, it has 2 x 1/4” TRS line outputs, 2 x 1/4” TRS line inputs, 1/4” dynamic mic input, stereo headphone output, 1 x MIDI In, 1 x MIDI out and a single Footswitch.
It also comes with a stellar 8 GB library of high-quality samples, sliced loops, drum kits, instruments, patterns, and projects right out of the box (courtesy of Maschine 2.0). And, the KOMPLETE 11 Select gives you unprecedented access to 11 premium instruments like MASSIVE and MONARK, and a huge list of effects. The sonic palette is only limited by your imagination.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The Novation Launchkey (MK2) is one of the easiest and fastest ways to produce and perform electronic music using Ableton Live. Why? You may ask. Simply because this keyboard controller was designed to match seamlessly with Ableton Live. Just plug it in via USB and the keys, knobs, and velocity-sensitive RGB pads give you immediate hands-on control of your session view, instruments, effects and mixer.
The launch clips, FX controls, play beats, and much more are laid out in two rows of eight each, coming to a total of 16 pads, to match your Ableton Live session view; one row to launch clips, and one row to stop them. Full-colour RGB LEDs mean that they’ll also match the colour of your clips.
The velocity-sensitivity further enables you to put some real feeling into your beats. Launchkey is designed to let you shape your sound however you desire to sound, with the eight rock solid rotary knobs for tweaking your instruments and effects. Launchkey comes with absolutely everything you need to start making music.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The APC Key 25 is the first Ableton Live controller from Akai Professional to be equipped with a high-performance keyboard. It is designed especially keeping in mind performing musicians or conventional composers. The APC Key 25 couples real-time control of the Ableton Live digital audio workstation with traditional composition tools.
Create melodies, compose bass lines, and play chords with the 25 synth-action mini keys. There are dedicated buttons for Octave Up, Octave Down, and Sustain, thus greatly expanding the expressive capabilities of the keyboard.
You can utilize the 40 multicolour clip-launching trigger pads arranged in a 5×8 grid to dexterously explore your music. The tri-colour lighting also provides visual feedback and displays three clip statuses, loaded, playing, and recording. This means you can get into the groove without even glancing at your laptop. The eight assignable control knobs for tweaking complete the compact controller to let you go anywhere with a computer without leaving any functionality behind. This is one of the most frugal one-stop application you can get for you money.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
Akai Professional states that the MPD2 Series is a product of more than six years of detailed customer research and user feedback. That’s exactly what the product looks like too. They have successfully created one of the most capable and user-friendly line of pad controllers among what Akai Professional has developed to date.
The MPD218’s 16 new, ultra-sensitive Thick Fat MPC pads create a super responsive user experience. It also has an expanded control set of six knobs in three banks that will enable you to maximize your sound and give you increased control over effects. MIDI information is sent over its plug-and-play USB interface to your computer system, eliminating the need to install any drivers. The USB connection also powers the MPD218, so the included USB cable is all you really need.
The MPD2 Series reflects a shifting evolutionary change of the pad controller. Many years of research and customer feedback has led directly to some of the most capable pad controllers Akai ever developed. These MPDs are the perfect bridge between your creativity and your computer-based studio. You couldn’t really ask for anything more.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The Alesis V25 is a powerful, intuitive MIDI controller that lets you take command of your computer’s music software without giving up your capacity for dynamic performances. It has 25 full-size velocity-sensitive keys and dedicated Octave Up/Down buttons, you can also further expand the keyboard to the full melodic range and play bass lines, chords, and melodies. It doesn’t get any more versatile than this.
The Alesis V25 offers expressive hands-on control for the amateur musician seeking an inexpensive, compact MIDI keyboard controller. The V25 is designed as part of Alexis’ new V series. With its V series, Alexis has combined velocity-sensitive keys with eight drum/trigger pads, allowing virtual instruments to be played with dynamic expression. The pads are illuminated by blue LEDs and there are four assignable knobs and buttons for enhanced visibility. Musicians can also produce projects quite quickly via the MIDI Learn feature. The octave shift keys also provides access to the entire note range.
The controller is powered by a single USB cord that acts as both a power adaptor and data connector cable. The V25 also comes with a Software Preset/Parameter utility that makes setup a snap. Ableton Live Lite 9 and Xpand!2 by AIR Music Tech are included as free downloads.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The new MPK Mini MKII is an ultra-compact keyboard controller that is designed to easily fit into laptop-toting musician’s backpack. It can however still earn its spot on the desktop producer’s crowded table space. Versatile is the word.
Keeping maximum portability as the main focus, the MPK Mini MKII has been designed in such a way that it requires no software drivers or external power adapter for operation. It supports plug-and-play connectivity, features USB-MIDI, and powers up with a single USB connection to your computer. It’s quite minimalistic, really.
The MPK mini MKII lets you record, compose, and perform with virtual instruments, effect plugins, and Digital Audio Workstations whenever inspiration strikes. It features 25 different velocity-sensitive synth-action keys, a 4-way thumb stick for dynamic pitch and modulation manipulation, 8 backlit velocity-sensitive MPC-style pads, and 8 assignable Q-Link knobs. Two banks further expand the number of MPC-style pads to 16 for extended creative capabilities.
Lastly, it comes bundled with a suite of professional music production software and virtual instruments. All of which are downloadable for free from the Akai Professional website.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
Anyone who uses Ableton Live needs a Launchpad. This is what Novation says and it’s not too difficult to see why. It follows the 8 x 8 grid of pads design that has today become ubiquitous with electronic music. The Launchpad will let you launch clips, play drum racks, and control your mixer, and all this while creating amazing lightshows.
Launchpad integrates immediately and seamlessly with Ableton Live, without any setup. It’s the pure definition of plug and play. The pads are lit by RGB LEDs, which match the colour of your clips in session view, so you can easily take a glance and know what’s playing. You can use them to launch clips, play drums, start and stop loops, arm tracks, and control volumes, pans and sends, further adding anything else you can imagine with Max for Live.
Launchpad is totally portable: lightweight, easy to pack and carry around, and fully USB bus powered, which means that there’s no need for power sockets. You can also link it up with more Launchpad’s or other Launch products to build yourself a fully hands-on Ableton Live studio, by combining Launch Control, Launch Control XL, or Launchkey. You seriously cannot get any more flexible than this with a MIDI controller.
Launchpad comes with everything you need to start making great music. Whether it be Ableton Live Lite, 1GB of pro-quality Loop masters samples or the Novation Bass Station VST and AU plug-in synthesizer. Everything.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The Alesis V49 is a powerful, intuitive MIDI controller that lets you take command of your computer’s music software without giving up your capacity for dynamic performances. It has 49 full-size velocity-sensitive keys and dedicated Octave Up/Down buttons, you can also further expand the keyboard to the full melodic range and play bass lines, chords, and melodies. It doesn’t get any more versatile than this.
The Alesis V49 offers expressive hands-on control for the master musician seeking an inexpensive, compact MIDI keyboard controller. The V49 is designed as part of Alexis’ new V series. With its V series, Alexis has combined velocity-sensitive keys with eight drum/trigger pads, allowing virtual instruments to be played with dynamic expression. The V49 adds to that pitch and modulation wheels, and four assignable knobs and buttons to open and close filters, adjust volume levels, activate effects, tweak parameters, and much more.
It is also accompanied by the excellent V49 editor software that lets you make further customisations and tweak controls. The controller is powered by a single USB cord that acts as both a power adaptor and data connector cable. The V49 also comes with Software Preset/Parameter utility that makes setup a snap and includes free downloads for Ableton Live Lite 9 and Xpand!2 by AIR Music Tech.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The nanoPAD2 is a compact, lightweight and sized to work well with any laptop or desktop computer, just like all of its siblings. Furthermore, the nanoPAD2 also packs in 16 great-feeling, dynamic-sensing pads and still leaves room for X-Y touchpad. In fact, there are four banks of pad assignments, providing a total of 64 pad assignments. That’s a lot for such a compact device.
The sixteen velocity-sensitive pads provide excellent response to your fingertips, and also realistically convey the playing feel to your sequencer or DAW software. Also, you can experience the 64 different pad assignments by switching the scenes. The X-Y pad can be used to control multiple synthesizer parameters and the new “Touch Scale” function lets you intuitively play phrases on the X-Y touchpad.
You can choose from sixteen different scales, and specify the root key and note range to ensure that your performance stays within the limits you set. It gives a lot of flexibility for what it is. The nanoPAD2 works with the “Korg Kontrol Editor” software that is available as a free download on the Korg website. You can choose from a total of four velocity settings.
You can also further specify note numbers, create user scales for the Touch Scale function, assign chords, assign control change messages and save all these settings for future projects. Power and USB-MIDI data travels down the same USB cable thus reducing clutter and paving the way for an uncluttered workstation.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The LPK25 laptop performance keyboard is one of the most portable USB-MIDI controllers on the market. It measures less than 13 inches across and weighs less than a pound. This means that it can easily fit into a laptop case, backpack or messenger bag. This is the controller you carry around everywhere you go. Keyboard players who want to work with software on their computer will find that the LPK25 gives their laptop the keys they need to easily express themselves until they’ve grown enough to go on to bigger and better equipment.
The LPK25 is a scaled-down relative to the MPK series of keyboard performance controllers. A series that has been extensively covered in this list and praised a lot. This diminutive keyboard is made up of 25 miniature, velocity-sensitive keyboard keys with a synth action. The LPK25 contains an arpeggiator, which steps through chords automatically, assisting musicians with creating quick melodic ideas. It’s the best choice if you need to finish work quickly and eloquently. Sustain, octave up and down and tap tempo controls round out the LPK25’s easy-to-learn layout. This is one of the best MIDI controllers for beginners or those looking to get into music production.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The Impact LX25+ MIDI controller is compact and portable. But that doesn’t mean it’s not good enough. The LX25+ is jam-packed with intelligent and expressive performance control. It hooks up automatically to your DAW. A feature that few other MIDI controllers can boast of. The Nektar DAW Integration is custom designed to work with major software like Bigwig, Cubase, Digital Performer, FL Studio, GarageBand, Logic, Nuendo, Reaper, Reason, Sonar and Studio One.
All these software take the functionality of the Impact LX25+ to levels way beyond what is normally offered by a USB MIDI controller keyboard. The hard work is already done with the Impact LX25+, your creativity is all you need to focus on. The 25 note velocity sensitive keyboard features synth action, full-size, piano-style keys.
The centre of the Impact LX25+’s control panel is dominated by a 30mm fader and 8 pots. Each control is fully programmable to send any MIDI CC message for use with your MIDI products. The Impact LX25+ also has 8 velocity sensitive pads that are calibrated to trigger at the lightest of touches bringing finger drumming well within reach with a nice and even velocity response. It also features a remarkable “Pad Learn“ feature, which allows you to just select a pad, play the note or drum sound you want on the keyboard and complete the assignment. That’s some high-tech stuff right there.
The 4 colour LED illumination indicates which pad map is currently loaded and can even tell you the type of MIDI message each pad sends. And with its excellent DAW Integration, the pads are automatically mapped in. The 6 dedicated transport buttons are always within reach and mapped to control Cycle, Rewind, Forward, Stop, Play and Record. There are also dedicated Track up/down and Patch up/down buttons located below the display. It’s extremely functional and requires almost no learning curve.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
MPC Studio Black is a still small and sturdy MIDI Controller. And it’s covered with several features. It has 16 Genuine MPC pads and 4 Q-Link control knobs with MPC Note Repeat, Full Level functionalities and 16 levels for inspirational workflow.
The MPC Studio Black also has improved knobs, scroll wheel, and the MPC Renaissance’s spun aluminium data dial. This means that it will hold up even longer and give you a better feel when you perform onstage.
Akai Professional’s MPC Studio Black merges real MPC pads, iconic workflow, and the same MPC Software used by the MPC Renaissance to give you a fully integrated portable production solution. The included MPC Software features 128-track sequencing capability and up to eight pad banks. The classic MPC3000 and two MPC Expansion packs are incorporated by a massive 7GB+ sound library.
The MPC Studio Black was designed in collaboration with dozens of working producers and musician. This means that it’s made to move and look good doing it. Literally, anywhere you go where you can connect it to your computer.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
Advanced.
Massive library.
Portable.
The Nektar Impact LX49+ is a premium keyboard MIDI controller with great features. It is also the bigger sibling of the LX25+. The Impact LX49+ USB MIDI controllers are jam-packed with intelligent and expressive performance control that are not even available on many premium products. It is custom designed to work with software like Bit wig, Cubase, Digital Performer, FL Studio, Garage Band, Logic, Nuendo, Reaper, Reason, Sonar and Studio One.
The 49 note velocity sensitive keyboard is a synth action with medium tension. It also has 8 Hyper-Sensitive backlit pads. The full-size, piano-style keys are covered to protect against dirt and dust while simultaneously complementing the Impact LX design. It has 4 velocity curves gradually increasing in dynamics and you can choose any playing style of your choice. You can also choose between 3 fixed velocity levels adjust sensitivity. Octave and transpose buttons as well as pitch bend and modulation wheels are within reach, so that you can quickly shift the keyboard up or down as needed or even apply additional articulation with the wheels.
It’s an extremely versatile no frills product with a great brand backing it up. One of the most bang for buck keyboard controllers you can buy on the market today.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
M-Audio’s Oxygen 49 features an all-new synth-action key bed with action that is adaptable, clean and precise. The natural profile keys are both velocity and pressure sensitive, for maximum expressive capability, guaranteeing to replicate every subtlety and nuance of your performance. The Octave Up and Octave Down buttons are so conveniently located that accessing the entire note range has never been easier, whether you’re playing intricate melodic lines, chords or bass lines.
Oxygen 49 is the ideal, ultra-portable production and performance control solution. It has 8 velocity-sensitive trigger pads for beat production, clip launching and 8 assignable knobs for mixing and manipulating plug-ins/instruments. It also comes with several Pro Tools including the First and Eleven Lite for all new and existing customers, as well as a Virtual Instrument Player (VIP). That’s some serious stuff accompanying the Oxygen 49.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The trump card of the Akai Professional MPC Renaissance is the inclusion of a MPC software that is dedicated to fuse the legendary potential of MPC with the processing power of your computer. It has more than 9 GB of sounds included with the Vintage Mode, which changes the output sound character to frequencies like the MPC3000, MPC60 among many others.
It has 16 Genuine MPC pads and 16 touch-sensitive Q-Link controls with MPC Note Repeat and Swing. The XLR-1/4-Inch combo inputs and dedicated turntable inputs let you capture samples from everything and anything. Endless possibilities. It has an integrated 4-channel USB 2.0 audio interface with 2-port USB 2.0 hub that enables audio to be manipulated and speeds faster than you can imagine.
It has 2 MIDI inputs, 4 MIDI outputs, and S/PDIF I/O ports to ensure that you stay connected to everything in your studio.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The MPD18 is one of the easiest way to add genuine MPC pads to your setup. Not to say one of the most effective. The MPD18 is an expressive and intuitive instrument for both studio and stage. It’s built around the pads of the industry-standard MPC and contains some of the same technology that gives tracks made with the MPC an unmistakably human feel.
It can easily be integrated with virtually any MIDI software, to delivers everything needed to create a great feeling track. At the heart of the MPD18 is its bank of 16 velocity and pressure-sensitive MPC pads. You can access three different banks of sounds from the MPC pads for a total of 48 sounds at your fingertips. The MPD18 also borrows the MPC series’ assignable Q-Link controllers, enabling you to control nearly any parameters in your software in real time.
The MPD18 also has 16 configurable pre-sets that you can program according to your varying needs. The MPD18 sends MIDI information over its plug-and-play USB interface and doesn’t require any drivers to be installed, whether on MAC or PC. The USB connection also powers the MPD18. In essence, it’s all you need. The MPD18 gives you the control feel of the MPC in a super-portable instrument with a compact footprint that’s easy to fit in any setup.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The Akai Professional MPK2 series combine deep software integration, enhanced workflow, and core technologies from the iconic line of MPC workstations with a keyboard for maximum flexibility. It’s the future, or that’s what it looks like.
The MPK249 features 49 semi-weighted keys with after touch pressure sensitivity, 16 MPC-style pads with RGB feedback, 8 Q-Link knobs, faders, and switches, and multiple on board transport buttons. Four pad banks expand the number of assignable pads to 64 total, and three banks expand assignable knobs, faders, and switches to 24 each.
The MPK249 is also optimized to interface directly with your computer over USB power and features plug-and-play connectivity, you can now go where you need to and have all you need, only because you shouldn’t have to leave anything behind when you have an Akai.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
You don’t see a lot of capable 32 key controllers but this one is quite an exception. The Air Mini 32 is a compact keyboard controller that rocks. It has 8 dynamic drum pads, with 2 banks for added versatility. It also features a drum pad learn feature makes it easy to assign patches to trigger pads.
The assignable controls can be front-panel programmed, opening up a lot of functions that are otherwise unavailable. It also has 8 knobs, 3 dedicated transport controls and 5 navigation buttons. It sports ten memory locations for saving your custom settings and dedicated pitch bend, modulation, and sustain performance buttons. The Octave / Transpose buttons further extend your access to the entire note range.
Oh, and it’s also USB powered with plug and play functionality. This is one hell of a compact keyboard.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The Minilab Mk II is a high quality, feature-packed controller which gives you hands-on access to the sounds in your virtual studio. You can now breathe new life into your sounds by playing, tweaking, tapping and twisting its rugged controls. This powerful controller is also bundled with several critically acclaimed software titles. They’ll have you creating professional recordings in no time.
The MiniLab Mk II is a powerful controller that’ll open up to you a new world of sound design, performance, and music production. Every element of the MiniLab has been carefully chosen to give you the best experience possible. The beautifully playable mini keys, responsive and durable performance pads and wiggle-free rotary knobs are all wrapped up in a compact, ergonomic and rugged design that has stood the test of time.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
M-Audio’s Code Series keyboard controllers offer several thoughtful design touches that enable you to create and perform your best. A keyboard that functions as a direct extension of your thoughts ensuring that you convey your musical ideas with immediacy, precision and clarity.
Code controllers are equipped with everything you need to produce some serious music. The extensive assignable parameter control is a breeze to use with multiple banks of faders, knobs, buttons, pads, and a smooth feeling pitch bend and modulation wheel on top. New to this line of M-Audio controllers is the X/Y Touchpad, which provides additional and direct interaction with effects and instrument plugin parameters across an X/Y axis.
In addition, you can also split the keyboards into four assignable zones to maximize the flexibility and functionality of your setup. You can for instance, trigger four different instruments in their own separate zone, or overlap zones and trigger two instruments at the same time. This is excellent versatility.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
So there you go, the 20 best MIDI controllers you can buy on the market today. Music production has become a hobby of late and with all the copyright and strict anti-piracy laws these days, more and more people are getting into music production. Besides, playing a track you created according to your specific tastes while going on a road-trip is a different kind of satisfaction altogether. It’s a wonderful hobby to pursue and one that you should consider getting into if you haven’t already.
MIDI controller is music management device to be coupled with software or computers. It can be used to produce music, remix existing tracks or make modifications to a particular soundtrack.
But before we go into what these things are and why you should be interested in them, let’s address the acronym. MIDI stands for Musical Instrument Digital Interface, and is an industry-standard protocol that’s been around for like 25 years or so.
Earlier, MIDI was used to connect up all sorts of external hardware boxes (synths, sequencers, samplers and the like), but if you’re new to computer music, or if you’re really just only interested in tweaking your music on your computer, all you really need to know is that it enables you to send input information directly from your controller to your computer. That’s a pretty big thing actually, and this is why.
A MIDI controller is a keyboard or control panel that might look like a synthesizer or a drum machine among others, but it doesn’t have any sounds of its own. It sends MIDI data, usually to a computer, which will then generate sounds on a software instrument or an external hardware instrument. Essentially, a MIDI controller triggers other devices to make sounds. Using a MIDI controller, you have the possibility of modifying or producing your music in an endless number of ways.
You must remember that sounds created using a MIDI controller are saved as a MIDI file and this often requires proprietary software to convert to mp3 or alter the sounds in a sound mixing software. However, most MIDI controllers made by established brands come bundled with downloadable proprietary software that have a ton features and native sounds along with conversion features built in. MIDI controllers are traditionally made to be using alongside computers and can be rarely, if ever used as standalone music production devices.
You’ll need to make a list of the features you can’t do without, USB power and plug and play functionality for example. Also whether you’re going be carrying it around a lot or just place it in your studio, portability is a big deal for some MIDI controllers. Things of course, also depend on what time of music you’re looking to make and that is discussed in detail below.
MIDI controllers in simple terms, act as a medium to produce music through software on a computer. This also opens up the possibility of using dedicated software to create very specific types of music. But there are also MIDI controllers which are better suited to specific types of music and are easier to work if you’re producing those kinds of music. These come with bundled with dedicated software specialised to work with a specific music genre.
For example, drum pad MIDI controllers are best suited to create EDM or a Hip-Hop tracks and come with special software that makes creating EDM and Hip-Hop music easier and smoother. You can also download other supporting MIDI controller software online which might again be inclined towards working within a specific genre. The possibilities are endless, really.
Yes and no, many MIDI controllers are USB powered with plug and play functionality and these are fairly quite easy to set up. You might want to look for class-complaint MIDI controllers that usually require no drivers to be installed. The more advance controllers however, do require a steep learning curve and quite a lot of tweaking and software integrating to get to the point where you’ll be able to create the music you want. But setting up these is fun too, especially after you’ve become skilled enough to try the more advanced music production tech out there.
Our list of the best MIDI controllers should be enough to get you started and then some more.
The Maschine Mk3 is a state of the art drum controller that is certainly the next-generation in music production and performance. The MK3 controller is a fast, intuitive, and fun way to create and perfect tracks and beats. It has an integrated hardware/software system that includes a sampler, arranger, mixer, FX, audio interface and much more.
It has two high-resolution colour screens that makes it easy to slice samples, browse and preview sounds, tweak FX and mix and edit your projects. MASCHINE’s Smart Strip can be used like a pitch wheel to bend sounds, experiment with perform FX, or strum sounds like a guitar. Your music will sound just like how you want it to, up to the minutest detail.
The Maschine Mk3 is also among the most convenient MIDI controllers that you can buy. There’s 8 touch sensitive knobs for precision sound-engineering. It is also USB-powered and packed with a built-in, pro-grade 96 kHz / 24-bit audio interface, you can record, play, and perform from literally anywhere. Furthermore, it has 2 x 1/4” TRS line outputs, 2 x 1/4” TRS line inputs, 1/4” dynamic mic input, stereo headphone output, 1 x MIDI In, 1 x MIDI out and a single Footswitch.
It also comes with a stellar 8 GB library of high-quality samples, sliced loops, drum kits, instruments, patterns, and projects right out of the box (courtesy of Maschine 2.0). And, the KOMPLETE 11 Select gives you unprecedented access to 11 premium instruments like MASSIVE and MONARK, and a huge list of effects. The sonic palette is only limited by your imagination.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The Novation Launchkey (MK2) is one of the easiest and fastest ways to produce and perform electronic music using Ableton Live. Why? You may ask. Simply because this keyboard controller was designed to match seamlessly with Ableton Live. Just plug it in via USB and the keys, knobs, and velocity-sensitive RGB pads give you immediate hands-on control of your session view, instruments, effects and mixer.
The launch clips, FX controls, play beats, and much more are laid out in two rows of eight each, coming to a total of 16 pads, to match your Ableton Live session view; one row to launch clips, and one row to stop them. Full-colour RGB LEDs mean that they’ll also match the colour of your clips.
The velocity-sensitivity further enables you to put some real feeling into your beats. Launchkey is designed to let you shape your sound however you desire to sound, with the eight rock solid rotary knobs for tweaking your instruments and effects. Launchkey comes with absolutely everything you need to start making music.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The APC Key 25 is the first Ableton Live controller from Akai Professional to be equipped with a high-performance keyboard. It is designed especially keeping in mind performing musicians or conventional composers. The APC Key 25 couples real-time control of the Ableton Live digital audio workstation with traditional composition tools.
Create melodies, compose bass lines, and play chords with the 25 synth-action mini keys. There are dedicated buttons for Octave Up, Octave Down, and Sustain, thus greatly expanding the expressive capabilities of the keyboard.
You can utilize the 40 multicolour clip-launching trigger pads arranged in a 5×8 grid to dexterously explore your music. The tri-colour lighting also provides visual feedback and displays three clip statuses, loaded, playing, and recording. This means you can get into the groove without even glancing at your laptop. The eight assignable control knobs for tweaking complete the compact controller to let you go anywhere with a computer without leaving any functionality behind. This is one of the most frugal one-stop application you can get for you money.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
Akai Professional states that the MPD2 Series is a product of more than six years of detailed customer research and user feedback. That’s exactly what the product looks like too. They have successfully created one of the most capable and user-friendly line of pad controllers among what Akai Professional has developed to date.
The MPD218’s 16 new, ultra-sensitive Thick Fat MPC pads create a super responsive user experience. It also has an expanded control set of six knobs in three banks that will enable you to maximize your sound and give you increased control over effects. MIDI information is sent over its plug-and-play USB interface to your computer system, eliminating the need to install any drivers. The USB connection also powers the MPD218, so the included USB cable is all you really need.
The MPD2 Series reflects a shifting evolutionary change of the pad controller. Many years of research and customer feedback has led directly to some of the most capable pad controllers Akai ever developed. These MPDs are the perfect bridge between your creativity and your computer-based studio. You couldn’t really ask for anything more.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The Alesis V25 is a powerful, intuitive MIDI controller that lets you take command of your computer’s music software without giving up your capacity for dynamic performances. It has 25 full-size velocity-sensitive keys and dedicated Octave Up/Down buttons, you can also further expand the keyboard to the full melodic range and play bass lines, chords, and melodies. It doesn’t get any more versatile than this.
The Alesis V25 offers expressive hands-on control for the amateur musician seeking an inexpensive, compact MIDI keyboard controller. The V25 is designed as part of Alexis’ new V series. With its V series, Alexis has combined velocity-sensitive keys with eight drum/trigger pads, allowing virtual instruments to be played with dynamic expression. The pads are illuminated by blue LEDs and there are four assignable knobs and buttons for enhanced visibility. Musicians can also produce projects quite quickly via the MIDI Learn feature. The octave shift keys also provides access to the entire note range.
The controller is powered by a single USB cord that acts as both a power adaptor and data connector cable. The V25 also comes with a Software Preset/Parameter utility that makes setup a snap. Ableton Live Lite 9 and Xpand!2 by AIR Music Tech are included as free downloads.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The new MPK Mini MKII is an ultra-compact keyboard controller that is designed to easily fit into laptop-toting musician’s backpack. It can however still earn its spot on the desktop producer’s crowded table space. Versatile is the word.
Keeping maximum portability as the main focus, the MPK Mini MKII has been designed in such a way that it requires no software drivers or external power adapter for operation. It supports plug-and-play connectivity, features USB-MIDI, and powers up with a single USB connection to your computer. It’s quite minimalistic, really.
The MPK mini MKII lets you record, compose, and perform with virtual instruments, effect plugins, and Digital Audio Workstations whenever inspiration strikes. It features 25 different velocity-sensitive synth-action keys, a 4-way thumb stick for dynamic pitch and modulation manipulation, 8 backlit velocity-sensitive MPC-style pads, and 8 assignable Q-Link knobs. Two banks further expand the number of MPC-style pads to 16 for extended creative capabilities.
Lastly, it comes bundled with a suite of professional music production software and virtual instruments. All of which are downloadable for free from the Akai Professional website.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
Anyone who uses Ableton Live needs a Launchpad. This is what Novation says and it’s not too difficult to see why. It follows the 8 x 8 grid of pads design that has today become ubiquitous with electronic music. The Launchpad will let you launch clips, play drum racks, and control your mixer, and all this while creating amazing lightshows.
Launchpad integrates immediately and seamlessly with Ableton Live, without any setup. It’s the pure definition of plug and play. The pads are lit by RGB LEDs, which match the colour of your clips in session view, so you can easily take a glance and know what’s playing. You can use them to launch clips, play drums, start and stop loops, arm tracks, and control volumes, pans and sends, further adding anything else you can imagine with Max for Live.
Launchpad is totally portable: lightweight, easy to pack and carry around, and fully USB bus powered, which means that there’s no need for power sockets. You can also link it up with more Launchpad’s or other Launch products to build yourself a fully hands-on Ableton Live studio, by combining Launch Control, Launch Control XL, or Launchkey. You seriously cannot get any more flexible than this with a MIDI controller.
Launchpad comes with everything you need to start making great music. Whether it be Ableton Live Lite, 1GB of pro-quality Loop masters samples or the Novation Bass Station VST and AU plug-in synthesizer. Everything.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The Alesis V49 is a powerful, intuitive MIDI controller that lets you take command of your computer’s music software without giving up your capacity for dynamic performances. It has 49 full-size velocity-sensitive keys and dedicated Octave Up/Down buttons, you can also further expand the keyboard to the full melodic range and play bass lines, chords, and melodies. It doesn’t get any more versatile than this.
The Alesis V49 offers expressive hands-on control for the master musician seeking an inexpensive, compact MIDI keyboard controller. The V49 is designed as part of Alexis’ new V series. With its V series, Alexis has combined velocity-sensitive keys with eight drum/trigger pads, allowing virtual instruments to be played with dynamic expression. The V49 adds to that pitch and modulation wheels, and four assignable knobs and buttons to open and close filters, adjust volume levels, activate effects, tweak parameters, and much more.
It is also accompanied by the excellent V49 editor software that lets you make further customisations and tweak controls. The controller is powered by a single USB cord that acts as both a power adaptor and data connector cable. The V49 also comes with Software Preset/Parameter utility that makes setup a snap and includes free downloads for Ableton Live Lite 9 and Xpand!2 by AIR Music Tech.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The nanoPAD2 is a compact, lightweight and sized to work well with any laptop or desktop computer, just like all of its siblings. Furthermore, the nanoPAD2 also packs in 16 great-feeling, dynamic-sensing pads and still leaves room for X-Y touchpad. In fact, there are four banks of pad assignments, providing a total of 64 pad assignments. That’s a lot for such a compact device.
The sixteen velocity-sensitive pads provide excellent response to your fingertips, and also realistically convey the playing feel to your sequencer or DAW software. Also, you can experience the 64 different pad assignments by switching the scenes. The X-Y pad can be used to control multiple synthesizer parameters and the new “Touch Scale” function lets you intuitively play phrases on the X-Y touchpad.
You can choose from sixteen different scales, and specify the root key and note range to ensure that your performance stays within the limits you set. It gives a lot of flexibility for what it is. The nanoPAD2 works with the “Korg Kontrol Editor” software that is available as a free download on the Korg website. You can choose from a total of four velocity settings.
You can also further specify note numbers, create user scales for the Touch Scale function, assign chords, assign control change messages and save all these settings for future projects. Power and USB-MIDI data travels down the same USB cable thus reducing clutter and paving the way for an uncluttered workstation.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The LPK25 laptop performance keyboard is one of the most portable USB-MIDI controllers on the market. It measures less than 13 inches across and weighs less than a pound. This means that it can easily fit into a laptop case, backpack or messenger bag. This is the controller you carry around everywhere you go. Keyboard players who want to work with software on their computer will find that the LPK25 gives their laptop the keys they need to easily express themselves until they’ve grown enough to go on to bigger and better equipment.
The LPK25 is a scaled-down relative to the MPK series of keyboard performance controllers. A series that has been extensively covered in this list and praised a lot. This diminutive keyboard is made up of 25 miniature, velocity-sensitive keyboard keys with a synth action. The LPK25 contains an arpeggiator, which steps through chords automatically, assisting musicians with creating quick melodic ideas. It’s the best choice if you need to finish work quickly and eloquently. Sustain, octave up and down and tap tempo controls round out the LPK25’s easy-to-learn layout. This is one of the best MIDI controllers for beginners or those looking to get into music production.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The Impact LX25+ MIDI controller is compact and portable. But that doesn’t mean it’s not good enough. The LX25+ is jam-packed with intelligent and expressive performance control. It hooks up automatically to your DAW. A feature that few other MIDI controllers can boast of. The Nektar DAW Integration is custom designed to work with major software like Bigwig, Cubase, Digital Performer, FL Studio, GarageBand, Logic, Nuendo, Reaper, Reason, Sonar and Studio One.
All these software take the functionality of the Impact LX25+ to levels way beyond what is normally offered by a USB MIDI controller keyboard. The hard work is already done with the Impact LX25+, your creativity is all you need to focus on. The 25 note velocity sensitive keyboard features synth action, full-size, piano-style keys.
The centre of the Impact LX25+’s control panel is dominated by a 30mm fader and 8 pots. Each control is fully programmable to send any MIDI CC message for use with your MIDI products. The Impact LX25+ also has 8 velocity sensitive pads that are calibrated to trigger at the lightest of touches bringing finger drumming well within reach with a nice and even velocity response. It also features a remarkable “Pad Learn“ feature, which allows you to just select a pad, play the note or drum sound you want on the keyboard and complete the assignment. That’s some high-tech stuff right there.
The 4 colour LED illumination indicates which pad map is currently loaded and can even tell you the type of MIDI message each pad sends. And with its excellent DAW Integration, the pads are automatically mapped in. The 6 dedicated transport buttons are always within reach and mapped to control Cycle, Rewind, Forward, Stop, Play and Record. There are also dedicated Track up/down and Patch up/down buttons located below the display. It’s extremely functional and requires almost no learning curve.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
MPC Studio Black is a still small and sturdy MIDI Controller. And it’s covered with several features. It has 16 Genuine MPC pads and 4 Q-Link control knobs with MPC Note Repeat, Full Level functionalities and 16 levels for inspirational workflow.
The MPC Studio Black also has improved knobs, scroll wheel, and the MPC Renaissance’s spun aluminium data dial. This means that it will hold up even longer and give you a better feel when you perform onstage.
Akai Professional’s MPC Studio Black merges real MPC pads, iconic workflow, and the same MPC Software used by the MPC Renaissance to give you a fully integrated portable production solution. The included MPC Software features 128-track sequencing capability and up to eight pad banks. The classic MPC3000 and two MPC Expansion packs are incorporated by a massive 7GB+ sound library.
The MPC Studio Black was designed in collaboration with dozens of working producers and musician. This means that it’s made to move and look good doing it. Literally, anywhere you go where you can connect it to your computer.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
Advanced.
Massive library.
Portable.
The Nektar Impact LX49+ is a premium keyboard MIDI controller with great features. It is also the bigger sibling of the LX25+. The Impact LX49+ USB MIDI controllers are jam-packed with intelligent and expressive performance control that are not even available on many premium products. It is custom designed to work with software like Bit wig, Cubase, Digital Performer, FL Studio, Garage Band, Logic, Nuendo, Reaper, Reason, Sonar and Studio One.
The 49 note velocity sensitive keyboard is a synth action with medium tension. It also has 8 Hyper-Sensitive backlit pads. The full-size, piano-style keys are covered to protect against dirt and dust while simultaneously complementing the Impact LX design. It has 4 velocity curves gradually increasing in dynamics and you can choose any playing style of your choice. You can also choose between 3 fixed velocity levels adjust sensitivity. Octave and transpose buttons as well as pitch bend and modulation wheels are within reach, so that you can quickly shift the keyboard up or down as needed or even apply additional articulation with the wheels.
It’s an extremely versatile no frills product with a great brand backing it up. One of the most bang for buck keyboard controllers you can buy on the market today.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
M-Audio’s Oxygen 49 features an all-new synth-action key bed with action that is adaptable, clean and precise. The natural profile keys are both velocity and pressure sensitive, for maximum expressive capability, guaranteeing to replicate every subtlety and nuance of your performance. The Octave Up and Octave Down buttons are so conveniently located that accessing the entire note range has never been easier, whether you’re playing intricate melodic lines, chords or bass lines.
Oxygen 49 is the ideal, ultra-portable production and performance control solution. It has 8 velocity-sensitive trigger pads for beat production, clip launching and 8 assignable knobs for mixing and manipulating plug-ins/instruments. It also comes with several Pro Tools including the First and Eleven Lite for all new and existing customers, as well as a Virtual Instrument Player (VIP). That’s some serious stuff accompanying the Oxygen 49.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The trump card of the Akai Professional MPC Renaissance is the inclusion of a MPC software that is dedicated to fuse the legendary potential of MPC with the processing power of your computer. It has more than 9 GB of sounds included with the Vintage Mode, which changes the output sound character to frequencies like the MPC3000, MPC60 among many others.
It has 16 Genuine MPC pads and 16 touch-sensitive Q-Link controls with MPC Note Repeat and Swing. The XLR-1/4-Inch combo inputs and dedicated turntable inputs let you capture samples from everything and anything. Endless possibilities. It has an integrated 4-channel USB 2.0 audio interface with 2-port USB 2.0 hub that enables audio to be manipulated and speeds faster than you can imagine.
It has 2 MIDI inputs, 4 MIDI outputs, and S/PDIF I/O ports to ensure that you stay connected to everything in your studio.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The MPD18 is one of the easiest way to add genuine MPC pads to your setup. Not to say one of the most effective. The MPD18 is an expressive and intuitive instrument for both studio and stage. It’s built around the pads of the industry-standard MPC and contains some of the same technology that gives tracks made with the MPC an unmistakably human feel.
It can easily be integrated with virtually any MIDI software, to delivers everything needed to create a great feeling track. At the heart of the MPD18 is its bank of 16 velocity and pressure-sensitive MPC pads. You can access three different banks of sounds from the MPC pads for a total of 48 sounds at your fingertips. The MPD18 also borrows the MPC series’ assignable Q-Link controllers, enabling you to control nearly any parameters in your software in real time.
The MPD18 also has 16 configurable pre-sets that you can program according to your varying needs. The MPD18 sends MIDI information over its plug-and-play USB interface and doesn’t require any drivers to be installed, whether on MAC or PC. The USB connection also powers the MPD18. In essence, it’s all you need. The MPD18 gives you the control feel of the MPC in a super-portable instrument with a compact footprint that’s easy to fit in any setup.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The Akai Professional MPK2 series combine deep software integration, enhanced workflow, and core technologies from the iconic line of MPC workstations with a keyboard for maximum flexibility. It’s the future, or that’s what it looks like.
The MPK249 features 49 semi-weighted keys with after touch pressure sensitivity, 16 MPC-style pads with RGB feedback, 8 Q-Link knobs, faders, and switches, and multiple on board transport buttons. Four pad banks expand the number of assignable pads to 64 total, and three banks expand assignable knobs, faders, and switches to 24 each.
The MPK249 is also optimized to interface directly with your computer over USB power and features plug-and-play connectivity, you can now go where you need to and have all you need, only because you shouldn’t have to leave anything behind when you have an Akai.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
You don’t see a lot of capable 32 key controllers but this one is quite an exception. The Air Mini 32 is a compact keyboard controller that rocks. It has 8 dynamic drum pads, with 2 banks for added versatility. It also features a drum pad learn feature makes it easy to assign patches to trigger pads.
The assignable controls can be front-panel programmed, opening up a lot of functions that are otherwise unavailable. It also has 8 knobs, 3 dedicated transport controls and 5 navigation buttons. It sports ten memory locations for saving your custom settings and dedicated pitch bend, modulation, and sustain performance buttons. The Octave / Transpose buttons further extend your access to the entire note range.
Oh, and it’s also USB powered with plug and play functionality. This is one hell of a compact keyboard.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The Minilab Mk II is a high quality, feature-packed controller which gives you hands-on access to the sounds in your virtual studio. You can now breathe new life into your sounds by playing, tweaking, tapping and twisting its rugged controls. This powerful controller is also bundled with several critically acclaimed software titles. They’ll have you creating professional recordings in no time.
The MiniLab Mk II is a powerful controller that’ll open up to you a new world of sound design, performance, and music production. Every element of the MiniLab has been carefully chosen to give you the best experience possible. The beautifully playable mini keys, responsive and durable performance pads and wiggle-free rotary knobs are all wrapped up in a compact, ergonomic and rugged design that has stood the test of time.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
M-Audio’s Code Series keyboard controllers offer several thoughtful design touches that enable you to create and perform your best. A keyboard that functions as a direct extension of your thoughts ensuring that you convey your musical ideas with immediacy, precision and clarity.
Code controllers are equipped with everything you need to produce some serious music. The extensive assignable parameter control is a breeze to use with multiple banks of faders, knobs, buttons, pads, and a smooth feeling pitch bend and modulation wheel on top. New to this line of M-Audio controllers is the X/Y Touchpad, which provides additional and direct interaction with effects and instrument plugin parameters across an X/Y axis.
In addition, you can also split the keyboards into four assignable zones to maximize the flexibility and functionality of your setup. You can for instance, trigger four different instruments in their own separate zone, or overlap zones and trigger two instruments at the same time. This is excellent versatility.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
So there you go, the 20 best MIDI controllers you can buy on the market today. Music production has become a hobby of late and with all the copyright and strict anti-piracy laws these days, more and more people are getting into music production. Besides, playing a track you created according to your specific tastes while going on a road-trip is a different kind of satisfaction altogether. It’s a wonderful hobby to pursue and one that you should consider getting into if you haven’t already.
T
here’s absolutely nothing like wearing a cracking pair of Chelsea boots for men to make you feel you can stomp your way through the world. Surely, nothing will dare get in your way. They are a style statement and ego boost in one. Now, Chelsea boots for men are becoming extremely popular.
You know about Chelsea boots, we’re sure. You know, those ankle-high pull-on boots that come with stretchy elastic material on ankles. Ah, now you remember!
Mainly, these are ankle-length boots with rounded toes, low heels, and two parts (the quarters and the vamp), made using a single piece of leather. There are no fancy buckles, laces or anything else either. Rather, it’s “put on and go” with Chelsea boots for men.
That is one of the biggest draws to these boots too.
Ready for a bit of boot history 101?
The Chelsea boot was first introduced to the world by one J. Sparks-Hall who had the prestigious job of bootmaker to Queen Victoria herself. It’s impressive that it’s still going strong. There must be a reason for all this success if you ask us.
While we all know the Queen obviously knew her boots, her style was not really insane compared to some we might see today. Her boots were plain and unadorned, but do keep in mind that this was the style of her time.
These days, they come with all sorts of extras. Think stuff like brogues, medallions, and fancy cap toe detailing. Queen Victoria might not have been amused but such things are the style of our time. Many men find them impressive looking, as they help them make a perfect style statement for them.
The short answer is everything, with very few exceptions maybe. They are extremely versatile which is what makes them a wardrobe must. Wear Chelsea boots for men with jeans or a suit and no one will bat an eye.
The clean and simple lines complement any outfit and leading designers are forever matching them into the latest fashion wear- useful to know if you know the fashion trends and follow that sort of thing.
Just to make sure your booty style statements rocks, there are different styles you can check out. Thick chunky soles create a casual look that means business. The new slimmer sole is perfect for the more formal occasion. A higher ankle is the vogue at the moment but it’s all up to you really.
These boots have their own style rules so experimenting, chopping and changing to suit what you are wearing, where you’re going and how you feel, just add to your boot wearing versatility. Slim jeans coupled with a crisp white shirt and a smart wool coat is one way forward but with so many style possibilities, it is a case of check it and see.
However, generally speaking, avoid the chinos. Not the best way to show off your Chelsea boots for men, at all.
Chelsea boots for men are now available in different colors. So, when you believe it’s time for a new outfit and boots to match, you have to consider boot color too for the perfect look. It’s a bit of fun old Queenie didn’t get to indulge in. Just by experimenting with colors, you can create a completely different style statement.
Here are a few suggestions for your consideration.
A pair of burgundy Chelsea boots is an all-around option. Good with everything. Similarly, if you want to stand out and be noticed for the fashion icon you are, choose from the more exotic colors, such as green, blue, red, or even yellow.
If you think only brogues, Oxfords, or loafers are suiting suitable footwear, you’re missing out. A correctly selected pair of Chelsea boots can work wonders to sharpen your business look. It is easy to carry off brown leather Chelsea boots for men with a stylish grey suit and create a smart look effortlessly.
Try matching the dark brown Chelsea boot with the classic navy or dark blue business suit and let the bottom of your trousers sit over your boots. It’s a classy combination for a classy business look and a contrast that works surprisingly well.
Some points to consider when you want to be suited and booted;
Chelsea boots work as efficiently with a pair of jeans as they do with your favorite classic suit. It is the uber-stylish classy look. Make it even better by pairing with a casual jacket and a stylish t-shirt underneath.
Who wouldn’t want to wear their Chelsea boots with jeans? It’s as natural as ham and eggs. Even so, to keep things bootily perfect take into account the material the boots are made from as much as the color. These details matter when you are a style leader after all.
Matte or suede creates a laid-back look for when you are taking things easy. But for casual smart, patent leather and high shine are just the ticket to get you noticed. A pair of black suede Chelsea boots will go with most jeans colors and styles and versatile enough to be worth the cash spent any time.
This is especially true if you are getting your wardrobe together on a budget.
Choose correctly to bring out your cool rockstar look by pairing with a leather jacket. Your Chelsea boots with jeans will create a modern refined look. Like Kanye West, keep things refined, by opting for a pastel color palette. Combine grey jeans with a plain shirt, a biker jacket, and black Chelsea boots to complete your smart look.
You all know that Chelsea boots are stylish, but because of their rather bulky appearance, some men often ask about how comfortable these boots really are. Apart from the fact they have stood the test of time, the comfort depends on the fit, material, and probably the shape of your foot.
It is a good idea to buy a pair of Chelsea boots if you’re looking for boots that fit snugly and sit nicely to your foot and ankle. To ensure that the boots are comfortable, you need to be careful about the sizing. Pick the right size only. There’s no ‘it’ll do’ here just because you’re shopping and would rather not be.
It’s important to get the fit right around your ankle as much as it to get the right length. A loose boot will be uncomfortable and for the sake of a bit of shopping perseverance, you’ll have wasted your cash.
And here’s why a good fit is so important. The Chelsea boot is not like regular footwear. This close fitting boot has its flexibility in the side panel. Traditional shoes have flexibility in the instep. The good thing is that Chelsea boots for men enjoy a reputation of being true to your actual foot size.
This is obviously helpful!
However, you still need to try them on and walk about a bit to get used to the side panel fit and make absolutely sure they are good to go. Here, you should consider if you’re going to usually wear the boots with thick socks because that would mean buying a pair with half a size bigger than your foot size.
Chelsea boots are comfortable because they have an elasticized panel to keep your foot secure. There will be a handy tab or loop at the back of your boot that you can use to pull them on with ease. Chelsea boots may feel a bit tight in the beginning because of their slightly narrow construction.
Thankfully, they tend to stretch out once you have broken them in nicely. Depending on the material used, the foot bed usually molds decently to your foot, making them even more comfortable over time.
Most Chelsea boots are made of leather, and are going to feel comfortable only when the leather is of the highest quality. When you know you get what you pay for and high quality leather comes at a high price, don’t expect those under $100 boots to compete with $500 shoes in terms of comfort.
When you opt for cheaper Chelsea boots, you get the upper glued to the sole not stitched. The quality of leather used may not be that impressive either. Boots made of cheap calf leather will eventually leave you dealing with some nasty creases.
It is sensible to give some thought to the construction method of any Chelsea boots you have your eye on to determine the quality. With a stitched construction, that can be resoled and used for many years, you get excellent value for money. For leather, opt for shoes made of full grain leather for comfort and durability.
Full grain leathers tend to age better compared to corrected grain leather that usually comes with a plastic coating. High quality fine-grained calf will always prove to be the most comfortable option but be prepared, they are expensive.
The quality of the sole matters, a lot. You can get rubber soles that are comfortable, but there are other options, such as vibram, lugged, or crepe that are casual yet more comfortable. A leather sole is a nice choice too, but you will have to protect it by using a thin sole protector.
Chelsea boots are now available in different materials, but the traditional ones have always used variations of leather. Today, it is possible to find them in suede too.
Suede Chelsea boots look great and are quite durable too, but you have to consider where and when you will be wearing your boots to decide if they are going to work for you or not. While suede exudes a sense of luxury, it demands a lot more upkeep.
If you’re in an area where it rains a lot or you have to deal with muddy walking conditions, you will be wasting money on suede boots because they cannot withstand moisture. They are the best for dirt-free environments.
For the classic look, you can always put your money on real leather Chelsea boots. They are perfect to create a sophisticated look, but pair them with jeans and the look goes rockstar supersonic. They are low-maintenance boots and age amazingly well.
They also work great for winter and autumn use. Opt for the ones that come with repairable soles and elasticized gussets and they will serve you well for years.
Leather boots look great but you need to take the right care of them ensure they keep looking perfect. To keep them clean, simply take warm soapy water and soak a cloth in it. Remove the excess water and use it to clean your leather Chelsea boots for men.
Work in a soft rotating motion to get rid of any dirt marks. Finally, apply brown or black polish to give your boots a new look. Try using a soft bristle brush here to buff the polish into the leather.
To take the right care of your suede Chelsea boots, you may consider buying a suede protective spray. The spray will offer some protection against the elements. Be sure to clean your boots before applying the spray. You may also want to invest in a suede brush to help maintain the nap or the surface of the suede.
This pair of ankle-high Chelsea boots is an attention-getter and looks great with most of your outfits. The streamlined design coupled with full leather construction gives it an upscale look.
Keep in mind that the lower back portion of these boots is actually made of a synthetic material, but that actually adds to its design and help you wear them with slacks, jeans, etc., which is great.
The insole padding really helps keep you comfortable when wearing the boots. The use of rubber soles and heels means the boots stay comfortable irrespective of where you wear them.
With a boot opening of 12.5”, it provides a nice fit. The presence of elastic gores and pull-on loop at heel means that you will find it easy it slip it on. While the fit looks reasonably good, some people have complained about the size being not true to their original foot size.
They believe ordering a size up is a good idea, but we think that is mainly for people with wider feet.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
If you’re looking for good quality suede Chelsea boots, these boots from Steve Madden will not disappoint. The combination of suede upper and crepe sole means that you will feel comfortable wearing the boots and they are going to serve you nicely for years to come.
The fresh pull-on style is quite unique and comfortable too. It adds a degree of versatility to these Chelsea boots. The good thing is that they are true to your original size and there is hardly any chance to order a size up or down. Just stick with your original size and they are likely to fit in just fine.
We really like the quality of the elastic sides, which is loose enough to help you slip it on and off, but tight enough to keep your foot locked in place. These boots are quite impressive as a whole, but keep in mind that quite like other suede boots they cannot resist the rain very well.
Fortunately, they can do just okay if you, mistakenly, step in a puddle.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
With its synthetic sole but genuine leather upper, the Oakford Chelsea boots are going to impress you for sure. The first thing you notice when you wear these boots is that they super comfortable. The credit goes to its air-cushioned, synthetic sole that is somewhat soft but quite durable because it is double-stitched to the upper.
The soft leather – grizzly leather to be precise – is also going to add to the grace and quality of the boots. The Goodyear-welt construction means they are going to last for a long time. The slip-on design means you will not have to face any issue wearing them quickly.
The design looks cool with subtle rib detailing. However, it is important to mention that the heel height may not suit some people. It takes some getting used to the height to feel more comfortable walking around in these boots.
Nevertheless, these slip-resistant boots look good and perform great in all kinds of weather.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The men’s Duke is a popular Chelsea-style boot known for its durability and versatility. You are not going to find issues in terms of durability because the use of Tier1 full leather upper means that it can withstand the elements quite effectively.
The sole is of high quality as well, but the good thing is that the boot can be resoled easily. With its Goodyear welt construction, it offers a good value for money. It means that if you take good care of these boots, they will stay with you for a very long time.
It uses a low-profile studded rubber outsole that means that the boot will maintain stability in any setting. The only issue is that the boot may be perfect lengthwise but may not fit perfectly when you have slightly wider than normal feet.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
These stylish Denham boots are quite suitable for men looking for classic Chelsea boots. Though it uses a synthetic sole, the upper is the real selling point for this pair. The quality of the leather used is quite impressive and seems to have the potential to withstand the elements.
It is easy to wear these boots, thanks to its classic double-gore silhouette and highly functional back pull-tab. It is equally comfortable to walk around in these boots because they come equipped with a memory foam sock for serious comfort.
The styling is nice, especially when you opt for the brown leather that seems to have a fine textured print. The sizing is reasonably good, but you should remember that the boot opening is 10.25” around, so pick a size accordingly.
Overall, it is nice, but the price may be a bit on the higher side.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The combination of leather and synthetic seems to work just fine for this Chelsea boot from Steve Madden. The upper uses genuine leather, so it is going to become more comfortable as you break in the boot. The use of smooth surfaces and elastic goring means that you can expect an easy and convenient pull-on entry.
The shaft has a 5.5” length from the arch, which is quite standard, but it is important to notice that there have been some complained about the boots not being very true to the size. moreover, the heel height, at 1.25”, may not work for everyone.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The finest Chelsea boots use full grain leather, and that is exactly what you get when you opt for the Ashford Chelsea boot from Dockers. The use of genuine leather makes it a preferred choice for those who value quality over price. Many customers have confirmed that the leather is of the highest quality and wears well.
The best thing about full-grain leather is that it looks better with age, and that makes the Ashford Chelsea boot a popular choice.
You’re less likely to experience any sizing issue with this pair, but keep in mind that shaft measures around 6 inches from the arch. The rubber sole looks solid and is likely to handle regular use with ease. To make it comfortable, the company has used the Comfort Zone Technology.
This means you can see a cushioned EVA heel pad, a latex footbed, and Fusion Footbed. These three zones of comfort ensure that you stay comfortable no matter often you wear the boots.
It is worth mentioning that the styling of the boot may be a hit or miss because some people just love the plain, classic look, whereas the Ashford Chelsea boot has brogue accents and handcrafted details. If you’re a fan of such details, the boot is going to impress you for sure.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
Available in classic black and brown colors, the MC137 by Metrocharm seems to be a good Chelsea boot to wear with your formal outfits. It sports a unique spherical toe design that adds to its style. With the height of the platform around 0.25”, it works quite well for formal as well as party wear.
Thanks to the presence of a cushioned footbed insole, you will not feel uncomfortable wearing these boots. Speaking of comfort, it is important to order the right size, which is easy considering the boot is quite true to the size. You can order as per your foot size and it should work fine.
The non-skid outsole is also a good addition. While the boot is quite comfortable, you may find it to be a bit on the expensive side as compared to other boots in the same category.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
To pull off a comfortable yet stylish look, you can place your trust in these casual Chelsea boots. While it uses faux leather upper, it looks good with its fur lining. The slip-on design, which is the trademark of Chelsea boots, works amazingly well, and the elastic side panel simplifies the task of wearing the boots quickly.
To enhance the comfort, the company uses a cushioned footbed. The midsole is reasonably good, and so is the non-skid outsole that offers good traction in all settings.
Another good thing is that the sizing is quite perfect and the boots do not run narrow like Chelsea boos for men might from many other brands. The round-toe design means that you are likely to feel comfortable in these boots even if your feet are slightly wider.
Due to the faux leather, they hold up nicely even when if it rains. Just remember that faux leather may not be as desirable as genuine leather that tends to age very well.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
These business casual boots work great with most of your outfits, and you can even wear them with your jeans or khakis without alerting the fashion police.
The use of a high-quality leather upper means you will find it comfortable and it will last a long time as well. In fact, the company claims that the upper uses premium waterproof leather. Though many customers believe it is not as waterproof as the company claims, it certainly performs much better than other Chelsea boots in this regard.
Something that you will appreciate about these boots is the comfort they offer. The use of leather upper is one reason, but the presence of anti-fatigue, fully removable footbed makes it even more comfortable to wear. The pull-on style coupled with dual stretch gore means it is easy to wear these boots.
Overall, the boots are great, but you may find the pair to be a bit expensive.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
This is a rugged Chelsea boot that is going to last a long time. It uses suede upper, which certainly requires some upkeep but is capable of serving you well for years. The good thing is that even though it looks rugged and rather masculine, it still looks modern because of its clean silhouette and sleek design.
The shaft measurement is about 5.5 inches from the arch and the sizing is close to perfect. Just order the size you usually wear and you will not find any issue in terms of fit. Its memory foam insole is also comfortable and keeps your food secure inside the boot.
The crepe-lie rubber sole is responsible for making these Chelsea boots for men one of the most comfortable shoes around. If you know what it takes to care for suede, you may certainly want to order this pair.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
Made of beeswax leather, the Bushacre up Chelsea boots from Clarks look quite impressive and professional. They serve as a perfect choice to match your business attire. The use of this premium quality leather also promotes breathability and keeps your feet dry.
These stylish yet rugged boots can resist water very well, which is an added benefit.
The rubber sole keeps things comfortable, but some people are of the view that the sole does nothing to improve the amount of traction. However, you’re going to see similar types of soles on all boots from Clarks, so you will have to bear with this actually.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
For all those suede lovers looking for a perfect Chelsea boot to include in their collection, this pair from Calvin Klein is sure to serve the purpose well. With high-quality suede upper, the boots are extremely comfortable. There is also some use of leather in detailing that makes them a good choice to wear with your jeans and casual outfits.
In terms of sizing, you will find mixed reviews. Most people believe that these boots run narrow, and that is actually true. You may be better off ordering half a size up than you normally do to get a perfect fit. That is especially true if your feet are a little too wide.
The boots are extremely comfortable and warm, but you may have to be a bit careful when wearing in rainy conditions. You may want to have some leather boots as your primary winter boots because the bootie from Calvin Klein has its limitations.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
When looking for the finest Chelsea boots, you can certainly pick something from the Steve Madden collection, and this Saine Chelsea boot will not disappoint in terms of quality. It uses leather upper, so you can expect it to be comfortable and age well over time.
The shaft measurement is 5 inches from the arch, whereas the platform is around 0.5 inches. Because of the leather, you may find it a bit tight when new but the leather will become loose after you’ve have broken in the boot. The sizing is usually not an issue, but some people have complained about the boot running a bit large.
In most cases, however, you will be just fine ordering your usual size.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The fact of the matter is Chelsea boots are popular because of their simplistic yet highly attractive classic look. Made using high-quality leather, they give you a timeless charm. It wouldn’t be wrong to suggest that when paired with the right clothes, they give you an old-fashioned alpha male power.
Just select the right color to go with what you’re wearing and pay special attention to sizing before finalizing your buying decision.
W
hat is it that gets her going? The big full on ‘forest bear look’ she can run her fingers through or the ever classic ‘not shaved this morning look’ of designer stubble? Caressing a clean-shaven face is appealing to many women, but beards are in fashion these days, thanks to celebrities such as Jake Gyllenhaal and Chris Hemsworth.
There are women out there who just can not resist a bit of facial hair fondling. If you are thinking of following the trend (growing a beard not the fondling), you need to train those beardy follicles to get the beard to be proud of.
Whether you opt for Ryan Gosling’s stache/beard combo or stick with a barely-there stubble, you will need to treat your facial hair right for the best effect and for that you need to make use of beard balms and beard waxes.
Both beard balm and beard wax are popular among men. Most beardies use the terms interchangeably, but the truth is that there are subtle differences. Here is what you should know when comparing beard wax vs. beard balm.
Beard Wax
Beard wax is an amazing grooming aid and works to protect your beard, much like a hair mousse or spray. It allows beards to be waxed and sculptured into styles that will hold the course of the day, especially if you opt for a stronghold beard wax. With different scents and natural ingredients such as coconut oil, beeswax and shea nut butter, not only does it smell good under your nose but your precious bristles will be softened and nurtured into the bargain.
Beard Balm
For extra conditioning worthy of the celebrity look, beard balm, the lovechild of beard wax and beard oil, is just the ticket, especially for the shorter look. It provides a medium hold for style and comes in a range of subtle fragrances from the oils used.
Knowing your balm from your wax will help you decided the most suitable product for your beardy locks.
Beard Balm for a Healthier Looking Beard
If your aim is to improve the touchy feely softness of your beard, use a good quality beard balm. It has the perfect ingredients for the job, carrier oils. These oils, such as argan or jojoba leave your beard soft, shiny and looking healthy. And it helps combat beard dandruff – which is a bonus. Argan and jojoba have similar properties to natural sebum produced by your own skin and apart from being extremely beneficial have fewer chances of causing any allergic reactions.
Along with carrier oils, there are essential oils added to beard balm. They bring the delicate aromas noticeable in the high quality balms. It is this cologne that ladies find so hard to resist. But beware, in their raw state, they are too harsh for sensitive skin so stick to using them in the balm, no matter what effect they have on the girls.
Butters are another key ingredient. Shea, coconut or any other, allow an even coating over all the hairs and protect against beard dandruff too. It’s the natural beeswax that makes styling your beard in your own unique way a piece of cake. For less than 4 inches of growth, it holds remarkably well over long periods of time too.
Things to Remember When Looking for the Best Beard Balm
Beard Wax for a Great Hold
The ingredients you find in a beard balm are usually found in a beard wax as well, but it all comes down to the ratio of ingredients. For a stellar beard, use wax, especially if you’re interested in a great hold only. It contains a much higher percentage of the beeswax which means a firmer hold for your beardy arrangement.
Another important thing to keep in mind is that not all beard waxes are going to have shea butter included in the ingredient list. Cheaper brands replace it with lanolin, which is a waxy substance used to give the wax its stickiness. It serves more as an additional holding agent.
Things to Remember When Looking for the Best Beard Wax
When it comes down to it, if you’re looking for a perfect grooming aid, a beard wax should be your choice. It controls rugged whiskers and makes your beard look complete. Beard balm is much lighter and serves more as a product for moisturizing and conditioning. So, select what your beard needs at the moment!
Both of these beard-care products will help you take good care of your facial hair. The length of your beard as well as your personal preferences will help select the right product for you. Once you have made the purchase, here is how to use beard balm and wax.
Both of these beard-care products will help you take good care of your facial hair. The length of your beard as well as your personal preferences will help select the right product for you. Once you have made the purchase, here is how to use beard balm and wax.
How to Use Beard Balm
How to Apply Beard Wax
Removing Beard Wax
You usually do not need to worry about removing a beard balm because it serves more as a leave-in conditioner, but beard wax has to be removed daily and properly. Not doing so will result in clumping and the dreaded beard dandruff. Not nice.
Now, use warm water to rinse your beard.
Yes, they can, but it all comes down to the types of ingredients each of these products contains. A beard balm is more likely to help promote beard growth because it contains pure argan oil and unrefined jojoba oil. These oils naturally moisturize the skin underneath your beard.
By massaging the balm gently, you can also help get rid of unwanted skin cells that hamper the growth of your beard. Some of these products may also contain vitamin E and other antioxidants that strengthen your beard and prevent oxidative damage to skin cells. All this will help stimulate hair growth.
While a beard wax can also help with hair growth depending on the ingredients, it is more for use as a personal grooming product than anything else. So, if your main aim is to promote facial hair growth, a hair balm is the better choice.
If your beard balm contains natural ingredients, most oils, and you use sparingly, it is okay to use it a couple of times a day. You can go for a morning and night application, especially if you’re using the balm to promote facial hair growth. You should be very careful when using beard waxes.
Remember that there are all types of waxes, and some even contain chemicals. Those so-called ‘beard fixers’ can give you a strong hold for a short time but may end up drying out your beard and your skin. It is better to avoid these waxes. Instead, opt for beard waxes with natural ingredients.
Crafted in the United States, this Honest Amish beard wax is a perfect choice for an improved beard control. Even a small amount of the wax is capable of giving you a good rouge hair control. It is a medium hold wax only, so you can expect light shaping. Therefore, it wouldn’t be wrong to suggest that it is more of a balm, also because of its ingredients that include a variety of organic oils and butters. Thanks to those ingredients, the wax works well for people who are still trying to grow a beard.
Unlike many other stronghold beard waxes, you do not have a hard time getting it out of your beard at the end of the day. Overall, it serves you well, but we believe it is better to use it when your beard is damp, as it ensures an even application. The availability of a recyclable 2oz tin is nice, but many people are of the view that the size could have been better.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
With ingredients like olive oil, safflower seed oil, carnauba wax, argan oil, sweet almond oil, jojoba seed oil, and more, this beard balm from Smooth Vikings is capable of nourishing your hair. Its regular use it supposed to strengthen the hair follicles and promote beard growth at the same time.
The use of the beeswax helps make styling easier and save you from dealing with an itchy and dry beard. Interestingly, the use of this balm promises a thicker looking beard, which is quite possible considering the number of oils it contains.
Just bear in mind that it is not a wax and may not be able to keep your beard in place for very long. But, as it is quite soft on your beard, you can go apply it twice a day for better control. The scent is not that strong, so keep it in mind if you’re looking for something stronger in this department.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
If you’re a fan of Prophet and Tools beard oil, you are going to like Premium Beard Balm as well. With ingredients like vitamin E, argan, jojoba golden, castor, and sweet almond oils, the balm is quite soft on your beard and helps mold it in shape as well. The use of natural ingredients helps moisturize your beard and promote a healthy beard growth at the same time.
You will really like the fact that the Premium Beard Balm is suitable for all types and colors of beards. This crystal white balm has a fast melting action that we really appreciate. It is better than other yellow beard balms that can stain, dye, and damage your facial hair.
It is super simple to use and a small amount will work just fine. However, you should bear in mind that it is more of a combination of wax and oil, so you should not expect a very strong hold. Also, keep in mind that it has a distinctive ‘citrusy’ scent, which may or may not work for everyone. Moreover, even though it contains natural ingredients, the company suggests you do a small skin test before you use it. So, keep that in mind when giving it a shot!
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
With more than eight essential oils combined with other natural ingredients, the Cedarwood Beard Balm promises an easy application and super soft beard. It does contain the stylish agents, like the beeswax, but the concentration is on the lower side because you can stylize your beard but cannot get a super strong hold lasting the whole day.
A good thing is that it does not work like other beard balms that tend to dry out your beard after a few days of use. In fact, it will prevent beard flaking if you’re already dealing with the issue. Many people love it because of its light masculine scent, which is actually the result of cedar and eucalyptus.
Another good thing is the availability of an all-aluminum canister, which means you can put it anywhere without having to worry about damaging it. The only issue is that the size is not large at 2oz, but nevertheless, it is at par with other beard balms in this crowded category.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
This beard balm from Viking Revolution claims to tame the burliest of beards, and it seems to work actually. It softens up your beard, all thanks to the availability of ingredients like jojoba oil, argan oil, and mango butter. The presence of the beeswax means it will also help you with styling but do not set high hopes in this regard because it offers a light hold only. But again, what should you expect when you know you’re buying a beard balm and not a fully loaded beard wax?
It claims to help you with improved beard growth, and though we could not find much evidence to confirm that, it is true that it penetrates into the roots of your beard and makes it feel smoother. It melts well and is easy to apply, but keep in mind that it has a strong citrus smell that may be a bit too overwhelming for some. If you have no problem with that smell, you can certainly go ahead and give it a try.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
If you’re looking for a wax that will help nourish your beard and style it as well, this product may work just right for you. Those who have tried it love it more for the way it smells. The scent is just outstanding, but again, you may have different preferences, so how good the scent is usually varies from person to person.
Will it keep your beard moisturized? Yes, it will. But, wait, isn’t it a wax? It certainly is, but we believe it leans more towards the balm than the wax, which is why it offers a light to medium hold. That means you may have to look for a better product if your goal is to find something that keeps your beard in place all day long.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
If an itchy beard is making living difficult for you, you may want to try this all-natural beard balm. With essential oils, such as sesame seed oil, citric fruits oil, and bergamot oil, you can use this offering from Urban Nomads as a beard balm, beard softener, beard conditioner, and of course, a styling wax.
As long as conditioning your beard matters, this product is surely going to help. When you want to use it to create trending beard styles, you may have to look for something else. It is still much better than many other beard wax-balm combo but is still not as strong as you would want your wax to be. But again, many waxes that offer a strong hold can damage your hair as well, and you won’t have to worry about it when using this Best Beard Balm.
Speaking of hold, you may not have many issues if you have a short bear of about 3 inches. Moreover, it is likely to work just fine to keep those “twangers” down and give you a more refined look. The scent (vanilla) is quite impressive and the application is easy too.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
It wouldn’t be right to call it a wax, especially if you’re after a stronghold wax. It is medium, natural hold at best. You may want to put your money on it if you need something that would deep condition and add a fuller appearance to your beard. The sweet citrus smell also goes in its favor. The scent strength is quite light though, so again, it may or may not work great for some.
You will like how easily the wax melts on skin contact, and that makes it extremely easy to apply it evenly throughout your beard. Another good thing is that it adds a bit of weight to your beard and gives it a fuller look. Some people are of the view that you should mix it with your mustache wax to make styling easier for your beard. You can surely give it a try!
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
With an impressive ingredient profile that includes apricot oil, tea tree oil, vitamin E, sweet almond oil, and even aloe vera, the Grave Before Shave is one reasonably good choice for anyone looking for a good beard balm. It is a nice smelling balm and most men will wear it without having to worry about the scent. They say it smells like a cigar, but you’re more likely to get a gingerbread scent. It is nothing strong and overwhelming, which works for many people.
The ingredient profile is impressive, but it is geared towards people interested in promoting hair growth. It moisturizes your beard and prevents issues like itching and dandruff. You cannot rely on it for stylish though. It is not bad, but you’re going to notice the hold lasting no longer than 4-5 hours. Don’t touch it and it may last longer, but do not expect anything out of the ordinary. After all, we’re not talking about a beard wax here!
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
Quite like other popular beard balms, it contains essential oils like sunflower seed oil, soybean oil, coconut oil, geranium oil, and lavender oil. There are ingredients too, such as the Beeswax, shea butter, mango seed butter, and cocoa seed butter. The combination of these natural ingredients means that the balm can thicken, nourish, and strengthen your beard.
Regular use will help make your beard more manageable, but do not expect it as a hardcore styling product, especially for a more mature beard. It does help tame the ‘fly-aways’ for a tidier look. You will get good results for shorter beards because it helps prevent the dry, wirey feeling associated with small beards. The scent is its highlight because you get a blend of vanilla oils and sandalwood. That warm and intoxicating scent will get noticed for sure.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
Both beard balms and waxes can help shape your beard, moisturize it, and prevent dandruff. What works best for you depends on your unique needs. Waxes work great for styling, but balms are great for a healthy beard. Be sure to check the ingredients and the size of the tin and compare it with the length of your beard to select the best grooming product for you.
Of course, we all know that a party or a music event of any sort can never rock without a good DJ present, especially, when you have to deal with young guys and girls who want to hear the DJ play their favorite trending track(s). Thus, you have to be top in your game and this can only come by having a good knowledge about the trending songs, understanding the skill of playing the right songs in your playlist in a way that’s befitting for your audience, and most importantly, you need to get the right DJ equipment, which is something you can’t negotiate. However, before we go further, let’s take a little peep into history class to see where it all began.
Back in the 80s to the 90s when Hip Hop, Techno, and Dance genres where slowly rising up to the occasion, before the likes of DJ Khalid, David Guetta, Calvin Harris, amongst others, took the Disc Jockey scene in the new millennium, it was the era of mixers and turntables. Those days you’d find the DJs using turntables with big disc plates doing what they love most on the wheels of steel as it’s called, or better still “scratching.” No doubt, it was quite something to exist in that era, where your finger scratching would do the trick. However, using these “big wheels with huge plastic plates” was sometimes kind of stressful for the DJs, especially when they needed to change tracks.
Although, it didn’t seem to be stressful for them until technology advanced as the years did and more sophisticated tools where used to make life easier for the DJs. One of the most important innovations was the introduction of software into disc jockeying, which made things not just easy but reduced the bulkiness of equipment required by the DJs. The DJ software installed on a laptop really made a big difference in the world of Disc Jockey. It opened the door for more new breeds of DJ to enter the industry, whilst creating new market opportunities for manufacturers.
Today, we see a lot of DJs, both the successful ones who have already embraced limelight and the upcoming DJ who is still mixing for a small house party or club in his or her neighborhood turning up the music for everyone on the dance floor, just by the use of a DJ laptop. Oh yes! You can say “small but mighty,” right? Well, that’s what technology has done for us. Now, you can have up to a thousand songs or more in your playlist stored on your DJ laptop. Thus, you don’t need to use a turntable again, well, unless you want to. Apparently, all you’d need is your DJ laptop (with DJ software) and your long list of songs, right? Well, you can definitely get your audience moving their body with your DJ laptop and songs collection but you also need to be comfortable doing what you love doing best. After all, how can you produce your best if you’re not at your best?
That’s where a DJ laptop stand comes in. It’s just like a musician who has rehearsed properly with his band only to get to his show to meet a faulty microphone. That could be really frustrating, right? Well, that’s the exact feeling you get when you’re mixing your music in a show without your DJ laptop stand. Thus, in this article, we would be shedding more light on the DJ laptop stands; the different types, benefits, the top ones in the industry today and more you should know before going ahead to get yourself one. Thus, stick around here. You’d learn all you need to know.
When it comes to DJ laptop stands, there are basically two major types to pick from in the market today. There is the shelf-like DJ laptop stand, which is the first type of DJ laptop stand that came out. Even though it’s kind of archaic to use these days, it’s obviously one option that comes in handy if you have a lot on your plate. This shelf-like DJ laptop stand is mostly made of aluminum and it mostly in the form of a trunk, which still stores all your DJ equipment after you are done with your work. Thus, it doubles as a stand and storage equipment at the same time. However, using this DJ laptop stand means you’d always need a big space to work with, which appears to be the only challenge you can face.
The second type of DJ laptop stand is what most DJs use these days. It’s the crane-like stand, which is more compactable, portable and foldable. Thus, it can be easily carried and used in any location whatsoever. Most DJs find this type of laptop stands as a better option than the previous. Hence, it’s more expensive than the shelf-like DJ laptop stands, but it’s absolutely worth the money ten times more. Apparently, most of the DJ laptop stands we’d be talking about in this article are categorized under this type.
It’s certain that a DJ laptop stand can go a long way in making the life of a DJ a lot easier, just like any other equipment that is designed for a specific type of people. Thus, we would be sharing the 3 main benefits with you here. First off, it’s the perfect equipment that can save you a lot of space as a DJ when you go to perform in an event, whether a big show or a small neighborhood club. As you know the average table of a DJ is usually filled with a lot of equipment, from CD turntables (in some professional cases), mixers and a ton of wiring. With a DJ laptop stand, you’d be able to hang your laptop above all that equipment, which saves you the space of getting a totally different table top for your laptop. Thus, you’d not have to switch positions frequently to reach all your gear at the same time.
Another Benefit of using a DJ laptop stand is the fact that they are quite comfortable to use. As you know, there is no DJ that sits down to perform. As a DJ, you have to stand while you perform, which means you may need some support sometimes. Thus, using a DJ laptop stand that is quite low or something close to your knees will make you bend more often. The constant bending could consistently cause you a backache. However, with a DJ laptop stand, you can adjust the stand to your height, where it best favors you most, thereby eliminating any form of back-injuries.
Getting a DJ laptop stand can also mean you’d enjoy some cool accessories you didn’t see in the old ones. Obviously, there is no one that doesn’t love the prospect of buying something that goes an extra mile. Some DJ laptop stand comes with an extra lower shelf, which allows the DJ place some other gadgets like their phones, pads, etc. In some cases, the DJ laptop stands have wiring accessories that help in managing the cables and wires passing the table.
Sometimes you may wonder what the DJ stands are usually made of due to its ability to hold some kind of weight and refusing to collapse while at it. Well, the answer is the 6061 aluminum alloy. This material is also known as Alloy 61S. The Alloy 61S consists of a hardened aluminum alloy that contains silicon as its major alloying element and magnesium.
It’s also made up of other elements such as zinc, chromium, magnesium, manganese, iron, copper, and other elements. One of the reasons why this material is ideal is because it’s dependent on heat treatment. Also, this material is easy to work on and it’s amazingly resistant to any kind of corrosion, even in cases where the surface is abraded.
This material can be re-heated comfortably and it would only restore some of its strength and end up aging naturally. Even though this is the material that makes up most DJ laptop stands, it’s also important to note that some people prefer to construct one for themselves and they choose to use the kind of material that they deem fit to do the job, like wood.
Most DJ stands are not usually that heavy but this is totally dependent on the kind of material that was put together to create it.
If the DJ laptop stand is made of the usual 6061 aluminum, the weight range is usually between 3 to 12 pounds. However, if you opt for a DJ stand that is completely made up of wood, it ranges between 20 to 50 pounds.
The Crane Hardware DJ Stand for laptops is quite an advanced DJ Stand. This is one of the best products to get in the market if you’re looking to invest in appearance.
One great feature of the Crane Hardware DJ stand is the adjustability function, which can be adjusted to your choice to give you that practicality and comfort you desire. Apparently, you can modify the angle in any position that best suits you, in order for you to have a better access to your equipment. This allows you to see better and even save more space. Thus, you can adjust the bottom and top of the stand.
One look at the powder coated steel frame and you’d notice its sturdiness, durability, and reliability. Also, the knob and lever sets are both composed of a solid aluminum, which enhances its resistance against any form of wear. The DJ laptop stand can be arranged in a C position to attain a maximum height or in a position for a stronger stability, plus, you can work with space beneath.
The great thing about this stand is the fact that you can simply fold and place it in the nylon drawstring bag that follows the package when you’re traveling. The lightweight of the stand makes it portable enough to mount your tablets, laptops, controllers, projectors and any other gear that is less than 8lbs, without consuming space.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
If you are looking to get the perfect multifunctional workstation, then you should be looking at getting this Pyle portable adjustable laptop stand. With this stand, you can be assured that you’d get your money’s worth because it’s quite reliable. Also, it’s made from lightweight materials, which makes it portable, with its height adjustable to meet your desired choice.
The Pyle portable adjustable laptop stand is one of the best workstations in the market when it comes to multi-functional uses. No doubt, the manufacturers of this stand had portability in mind when it was created that’s why it has an aluminium frame, which gives it a lightweight.
Thus, it’s easy to move about when need be, plus, assembling the stand is quite simple. Also, it’s sturdy and it’s multi-functional to act as a DJ stand or even a desktop gaming system. It also has an adjustable height of 6.3 to 10.9-inch, which can meet your exact needs without you stressing.
The Pyle laptop stand has an anti-slip design, which will protect your gear from slipping-off by mistake.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
If you are particular about looks, then you’d love the Skyzonal laptop stand. It has a unique design that gives it a unique look that will catch the eye of everyone in the club.
Even though this laptop stand isn’t specifically designed for DJs, it’s suitable for them. It has a beautiful finish that matches any silver Apple MacBook, giving your DJ platform that special look it deserves.
The Skyzonal laptop stand is an original patented design made from aluminium alloy, which has the ability to raise a laptop screen height for better ergonomics. Thus, the height of the stand can be collapsible, adjustable, plus the angle is rotatable. Its portable size makes it quite convenient to use and carry.
Another great feature of this stand is its ability to tilt left or right without slipping, which enhances the airflow around the laptop. With this stand, you can be assured that your DJ gear would be free from any sudden fall during your performance because it has a single-piece aluminium build that gives a strong stability.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The Rockville stand is another multi-functional stand that’s perfect for carrying all your DJ gear. It can be used to hold a laptop, lighting controller, CD player, mixer, and any other key DJ accessories all at the same time. We can call this stand a “magic workspace” that can take all your DJ accessories.
The material used in making the stand is aircraft-grade aluminium; which makes it a high-quality and heavy duty stand. Also, it’s quite rugged, stable, and easily collapsible, thus, you don’t have to bother yourself about moving it from one place to another.
The Rockville stand is quite light in weight, which makes it easy to be folded for storage. Thus, it will only take you 30 to 60 seconds to disassemble and assemble it with ease.
When it’s disassembled, it takes a flat shape, which gives it a totally different look, considering the fact that the stand is large. It’s definitely not what anyone would expect. Thus, you can easily toss it in your car’s trunk when you’re travelling.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
If you want to enjoy your job as a DJ, then you’d definitely not compromise your fun by banking on a substandard DJ laptop stand when you are performing in a show or probably practising at home. Obviously, having a stable stand for your DJ gear is an important step. This Pyle portable folding stand has a rotatable and telescopic function, which makes it a perfect option for any DJ that loves the quality. Its large platform makes it suitable to hold more DJ gear.
Thus, if you’re looking for a robust platform to enhance the safety and comfort of your laptop or turntable, the Pyle PLPTS55 is the perfect option for you. This stand was sturdily created for you to enjoy an awesome experience.
The telescopic function of this stand makes it easy for you to increase the height of the stand to a suitable position for you to work with ease. All you need to do is adjust the height and enjoy the comfort you deserve.
The great thing about this DJ stand is the fact that it’s portable, even with its large platform. This stand has an anti-slip tray, which will definitely save your laptop from slipping accidentally.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The Odyssey Standalone DJ stand is a pretty simple DJ laptop stand. It comes with basic configurations, which helps to add flexibility to a DJ’s experience. Thus, many people that buy this product are bound to acknowledge the ease of this product.
Another good feature about this stand is the fact that it’s lightweight and portable. It also comes with a set of clamps. The biggest advantage of this stand is the fact that it has the perfect height for the needs of many of its users.
Thus, you can truly make a statement by subtly “yelling louder than cool” with the Odyssey L Stands DJ laptop stand. Apparently, a unique and sharp twist has been added to this stand, as it’s quite adjustable.
If you a DJ that like to keep things on the low and still make a huge impact with your audience, then this Odyssey Standalone DJ stand will be the perfect choice for you. The Odyssey DJ stand comes in many versatile colors, which gives you the opportunity to choose from a long list, which makes it hard sometimes to pick the one that’s most suitable for your personal brand.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The biggest advantage of the Pyle Portable Dual Laptop Stand is its versatility, as it can be used for different functions. Thus, it’s renowned as one of the few dual laptop stands that are made from a top-quality material with a capacity to handle heavy-duty functions.
This DJ laptop stand will do a good job of holding your DJ gear and laptop without any stress. It also comes with pre-drilled holes, which enables you to customize its size with ease.
The pre-drilled holes protect your DJ laptop stand to a table or wherever you need to place it. It has a total dimension of 14.0-inch x 26.4-inch x 13.4-inch, which provides a lot of space for your gear.
It’s also quite easy to assemble and it’s highly adjustable. As a matter of fact, this stand has an adjustable height feature that extends as far as 9-inch, plus, the rods and holes found on the support can be easily adjusted for your convenience and comfort.
If you are looking for a stand that will last you for long, then you’ve found one-as it’s made with sturdy materials with supreme steel quality.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
If you’re a digital DJ, then the RockJam laptop stand would definitely meet your standard. This stand is created from top-quality materials, thus it’s highly reliable and durable. You don’t have to worry about your DJ gear falling off when you’re scratching the wheels.
This RockJam laptop stand can comfortably hold up to 8 pounds of weight, plus, it can be adjusted to different height dimensions as you desire. This DJ laptop stand has the capability of carrying various controllers and CD players.
The beauty of having the RockJam laptop stand is the fact that it’s multifunctional. It doesn’t only serve as a platform for your DJ gear, but it can also act as a stand for other gadgets comfortably, whether you’re home or performing outdoors.
The Rockjam Laptop Stand is the perfect DJ laptop stand for any DJ that is about starting his or her career, as all you’d need for a start is a DJ laptop that will serve your needs, and that’s what you would be getting when you buy this DJ laptop stand.
Thus, it’s tested and trusted to meet the hassles, from the most common gigging DJ to the ardent home user. This RockJam laptop stand is highly flexible, tilt, rotatable, and its height settings enable you to make all the customization you desire.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
If you’re in search of a DJ laptop stand that has a minimalistic and simple appearance, the Hercules DG400BB laptop stand would impress you, because this laptop stand comes with an easy-to-manipulate mechanism, due to its simple and assembled piece.
As long as you don’t have a thing for complexity, you’d love this stand because it’s easy to use. Using the Hercules DG400BB laptop stand means that you’ve practically signed up for no future problems that have to do with loose parts.
This is because the DJ stand is built with no loose parts. When you take a good look at the upper part of the stand that functions to support the weight of electronic devices, you’d notice that it’s totally adjustable, which is awesome, especially, if you’re keen about comfort when you’re working.
Apart from being comfortable, this DJ stand gives you the opportunity to manipulate the angle of the device to any position you deem fit.
If by any chance you find yourself in a position where you need to adjust the height for any reason whatsoever, this DJ stand permits the adjustment.
Most times, some DJs look for stands that have a good support to avoid a collapse when they mount their equipment to work. This is the reason why this stand has a thick ladder-like structure that leads down to two front and rear legs.
The front legs and rear legs have a robust design and component that functions to give adequate support for the device. Another interesting feature of this equipment is the fact that the package comes with a laptop stand and a laptop bag.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
To a large extent, the name of this product gives you a clue about what to expect from it. If you’re DJ who is always on the go, this ultimate support compact laptop stand would definitely be in your favor for many reasons.
The reason why this stand is quite good for people that are always on the go is that it’s structured in such a way that you can fold it down easily. Once you’re done folding it, you can store it effortlessly in your backpack, laptop or travel bag because the stand has a folded width, height, and length of 10 x 1.25 x 13.25 inches.
You have nothing to worry about when you place your laptop on the top shelf because the stand has a secure lip design that gives your device the required support and locks it needs.
The flexibility of the stand is something to admire because it allows you to pick multiple configurations and angles based on your needs. The feet of the stand is not left out, because its low profile design and wideness permits easy sliding of your DJ equipment with ease.
By using this product, it means that you can easily set your equipment up on the stand. It also implies that regardless of the angle that you choose to position the stand, the tightening mechanism always ensure you have a strong grip.
The ultimate support compact laptop stand is perfect for a DJ, designer, gamer, producer or anyone that loves to elevate their laptop in sturdy style. You can depend on this stand for its stylish and rigid support to back you up for other permanent applications.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
You can be sure that this ultimate support multi-purpose laptop/DJ stand has a way of allowing you to enjoy so much support and fun.
The fact that it’s a multi-purpose stand, could make you assume that it’s heavy but that’s not the case, because it’s made of lightweight materials such as an aluminium frame. This stand is a good choice because it’s not just strong but it’s quite simple to disassemble and assemble, plus, it’s easy to carry as well.
The ultimate multi-purpose stand is quite handy when you have issues with limited space in your Dj Booth or when you require a firm laptop stand that would support your devices while you’re working.
Arranging your equipment on this stand could be so much fun because you can mount anything you choose to. It’s doesn’t have multi-purpose in its name for nothing. As a matter of fact, you can also decide to put this stand to use for other activities in your home as well.
In case you’re worried about the strength of the stand, you don’t have to be again. The reason is simple; it happens to be one of the most stable structures that the market can offer you. The lightweight aluminium frame that was mentioned earlier contributes largely to the strength of the stand.
It also allows you to carry the stand easily on the go. It’s almost impossible not to notice its vented second tier, which is perfect for other accessories while the main tier functions to hold large devices like your monitors, laptop, DJ equipment, lighting, CD player, etc.
However, when you’re mounting your equipment, it’s important to note that this stand has a weight capacity of 20 pounds.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
A whole lot of DJs and musicians would easily fall in love with the Digistand LP01 stand because it’s yet another stand that is foldable. This stand is made from durable and lightweight aluminium alloy.
This material contributes to making the compact folding design perfect for easy storage and traveling. During performances, this stand would make you be at peace because it conveniently has a spring-loaded quick-release latch.
The spring-loaded quick-release latch helps to secure the tray and legs by locking them. This invariably ensures stability and safety during performances.
It could be so much work sometimes when you have to deal with complicated gears and hinges but that’s totally eliminated with this stand because you don’t need to tighten or loosen any complicated gears or hinges each time you need to use the stand.
The Digistand laptop stand has the ability to lock itself thanks to its spring-loaded latches. When you’re done using the stand, all you need to do is pull on the laches and it would fold. It sounds easy, right? Well, this stand is one of the easiest, quickest and most spontaneous laptop stands to setup and breakdown.
If comfort is your priority, just angle the laptop tray down slightly and there you have it- additional comfort and safety. If you’re in a tight environment, you can just rotate it left or right to suit you. The height can also be altered from 13.5 to 16.5 inches.
The Digistand laptop stand also comes with sleeves and rubber rings. The function of the rubber rings and sleeves is to ensure that the laptop and work surface don’t encounter any scratches while protecting it against slipping and sliding.
When you purchase this stand, it comes with a carrying pouch to help you store and protect your stand and devices.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The Gearlux laptop stand is an option to consider for DJs, lighting engineers, and musicians. This laptop stand has the ability to hold laptops that are as wide as 19 inches. The Gearlux stand can also accommodate mixers, printers, controllers, CD players, etc.
Regardless of the situation of things, you can choose to use the Gearlux as a stand-alone laptop stand or make good use of the clamp it has on a table or desk for an extra layer of stability. You can be assured that the padded arms will keep your devices from slipping-off easily; instead, they would be firmly in place.
When you purchase this stand, you have the opportunity of choosing four different height options ranging from 9.25, 10.83, 12.4, and 14.17 inches. If you choose to adjust the width to accommodate different sizes, the stand permits it within a range of 9.45 to 11.42 inches.
There’s no doubt that this laptop stand would take your music to new heights, as it would allow you to work from your home studio or out on stage diligently.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
A mere glance at the odyssey L-360 stand, you’d be convinced that it’s capable of serving its purpose. The laptop stand has an allowance for pre-drilled holes or clamps, which you can use to secure the stand to your workstation.
The stand can be adjusted to your taste with its ability to go from at least 6 3/4 to 111/2 inches high. The Odyssey laptop stand has support arms that can reach almost 11 inches in length.
The dimension of this laptop stand is 1.5 x 14 x 13 inches and it has the capacity to hold a laptop that is 9-inch in size or more. If you want to adjust the width and height of the stand to meet your needs, simply use the pre-drilled holes.
Your laptop doesn’t stand a chance of slipping off the support arms of the stand because the bent up toes keeps it firm.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
If you prefer a laptop stand that is a rugged unit, then you’ve found yourself a match. The UDG aluminum laptop stand has an oversized mid tray that can be used to hold your external hard drive.
The UDG stand is sturdy with its high-quality composition and construction. It’s no surprise because it’s made of a tough material and high-quality aircraft grade anodized aluminum.
There’s nothing to worry about when it comes to the security of your gadgets when you mount them on the stand.
Another sweet thing about this laptop stand is the fact that it’s portable. Sacrificing the space you occupy would be totally unnecessary because it allows you to compose or edit your music without taking up so much space.
Changing the height and angle to your taste is quite easy considering the fact that the tray itself can rotate. This feature would be quite favorable if you’re particular about the vision or angle of your device.
One feature that would catch your attention and warm your heart is the fact that the stand protects your device from overheating because of its airflow constructed tray. Earphones and other small materials can be placed in the stand’s removable sub-tray.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
This laptop stand has the ability to withstand a level of pressure and heavyweight due to its durable metal construction. The Magma Vector is a fantastic choice if you feel that the price of a crane stand is way above your budget.
It could serve multiple purposes by supporting a DJ controller pad and an electronic device at once. The ruggedness of this laptop stand is remarkable.
Being in a cramped DJ booth is nothing to worry about because you can simply place this stand under media players or DJ mixers since its feet are slim.
You can trust it to secure your devices because it has a slip guard rubber that keeps your devices from slipping out. The height range of this stand is between 14 to 22 inches.
For better view and usage you can rotate the laptop table tray in 360 degrees. When you purchase this stand, it comes with a set of colored non-slip rubber rings and transportation pouch.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
One of the big highlights of a party is when a DJ is mixing and playing the music that everyone loves. However for all of this to go down well, the DJ in question has to be equipped with the right gear.
The right gear is the laptop stand and for you to get the one that suits you, it’s advisable to take the quality, size, and weight of your laptop into consideration to help you narrow your options and leave you with the best option.
I
f you’re hoping to find the perfect body wash that’ll make your hyper-masculine body well-moisturized and clean, worry less because you’ve gotten to the right place where you will get all the necessary information about the latest and best men’s body washes in 2019.In the past, many men saw the use of body washes as more of a woman thing! Thus, they believed that a block of soap in their bathroom will always do the trick. However, times and things have changed, so much that you see more body washes in a guy’s bathroom than the regular soap they have been used to.
So, what happened exactly? A lot of blokes discovered that the body washes gave their skin better hydration than the normal soap bars. Also, men are generally lazy when it comes to taking care of their skin. Thus, some men see the body washes as an easy route for them to keep their skin hydrated rather than using lotions or exfoliators on their skin. However, these days, using men’s body wash has grown from being just an easy way out to the regular lifestyle of a perfect gentleman that is dapper and smooth.
A body wash has become an essential tool in the grooming kit of every suave bloke in town, even though the women were the first to “enter the train.” This, however, amounts to the reason why the sales of bar soaps declined at least 40 percent lower last year and it’s definitely not doing so well this year.
Apart from the fact that most men’s body wash has this awesome and unique fragrance, it’s also believed to give you that special swagger that will make the ladies flock around you. However, it’s important to note that there are different types of body wash for various skin textures. Thus, you should be able to know what suits your skin best.
That’s why we made this post to help you make the right choice when you’re selecting from the top 14 men’s body washes in 2018.
So, keep reading. You will get all the information you need to know concerning these awesome men’s body washes.
The men’s body washes which are also called shower gels can be seen as a fresh arrival in the area of men’s spa and grooming.
However, it has great impacts for users worldwide, that’s why it has become a popular demand amongst men, especially for those that are stylish. Thus, we will be sharing with you a few benefits of using the man body wash over the average conventional soap bar that was used in the past.
It wasn’t too long ago that many men discovered the simplicity and ease of using a shower gel over the soap bar, considering the difficulty of removing soap residue from your soap dish. Another frustrating thing is the fact that is quite harder for an average soap to lather when compared to a shower gel or body wash that lathers easily and rapidly as it comes in contact with your skin.
The versatility of a body wash is another great benefit it has over a soap bar. This clearly means that the body wash could double as a shampoo for washing your hair, especially if the body wash lathers well. Thus, rather than carrying a bunch of bar soaps for vacation, you can easily carry just “a single bottle” which will do the work of a bathing gel, shampoo, etc. Nonetheless, you must ensure you use a natural body wash that doesn’t have any form of synthetic chemicals which may dry your hair texture out.
The versatility of a body wash or shower gel extends to you using it as a perfumed hand wash or even for a foaming bubble bath.
If you want to get a good sugar scrub, a body wash can be a good option for you. The main use of a sugar scrub is to help you clear out dead and dry skin from your body because it acts as an exfoliating and moisturizing agent. The sugar scrub is most useful during the winter season.
You can mix three cups of your regular table sugar with one-quarter cups of sweet almond oil, jojoba oil with three teaspoons of your body wash, and you have gotten yourself a sugar scrub that will do justice to your dry and dead skin layers. This solution will save you the cost of buying an expensive sugar scrub. Let’s just say it’s a DIY gift on the house, for reading this post.
When bar soaps came into existence, it was having a nice time and all the attention from different skins across the globe until the body wash happened. This brought about a war between the bar soap and body wash that doesn’t seem like it’s coming to an end anytime soon.
This war has left people in confusion as regards which is best but the answer to this lies in what you intend to get from using whatever you choose. However, to make your choice easier there’s a list of things you should consider, for instance; skincare.
When you’re considering skincare, it’s important you know that bar soaps have tendencies of overly drying. The reason for this is the chemical called sodium hydroxide that is usually found in bar soaps. This is what brought about the rule that states; “it’s quite unsafe to use bar soaps on your face.”
The good news is that there are higher-end bar soaps in existence that do a good job hydrating just like the body wash as a result of moisture-rich ingredients like aloe vera, botanical oils, and glycerin.
Hygiene is another category to consider. In this case, it’s normal for people to say that bar soap promotes the growth of bacteria on its surface, especially when there are chances that anybody close to you can share your bar soap without you noticing. Well, the best answer to this is research. This is because it has shown that there’s minimal risk when you use a bar soap that has been used previously by another person.
When it comes to shower gels, they are immune to mystery hair but they can’t seem to escape the fact that the wash clothes and loofahs that are used alongside with it are a major breeding ground for mold and bacteria. If you want to judge from the view of overall ease of use, the bath gels require its cousins; loofahs and wash clothes for effective use and loads of water to wash it out completely.
This process isn’t easy when compared to bar soaps that just need to be taken out of the box, rubbed on the skin and washed out with less water.
If you travel a lot, even though you’re certain that your bar soap wouldn’t explode in your traveling bag and soil your clothes, it’s usually preferable to carry a travel-size body wash on the go. Also, when you consider cost-effectiveness, there’s a high tendency of you squeezing out more body wash that you don’t need.
While the case of a bar soap depends on how you keep it away from water and how often you use it. However, the bar soap reduces anyway. When your body wash is almost finished, all you need to do is flip it upside down and you’d have some of it crawling to your palms. But when your bar is close to the end of its lifespan, it becomes so small and almost impossible to use.
After comparing the body wash and bar soap in different categories, you can easily tell who won or lost but it all boils down to what you prefer. Hence, make up your mind, try out a few, and go with your final decision.
It can be so difficult to make a decision on which body wash brand to purchase because there are far too many out there. However, we are going to narrow down the endless list to ten so that your decision isn’t that tough anymore. The first brand we’re going to mention is Neutrogena.
They are also a brand to trust because they have been in the business as far back as 1930 in Zurich. This company owned by Johnson and Johnson offer a wide range of hair care, skin care, and cosmetics. Their body wash variants include Rainbath refreshing gel and Pink Grapefruit.
The next on this list is a British cosmetics company that was founded in 1976 by Dame Roddick. The Body Shop specializes in hair care, body care, face care, fragrances, and makeup. Since they are against animal cruelty, they use strictly vegetarian ingredients and the sweet smell of rose and grapefruit seed oil will do more than convince you.
If you’re on a budget, Pears is another interesting brand that provides you with an amazing body wash that’s loaded with moisture. Their products are widely used because they are usually rich in glycerin and mineral oils. Another wonderful brand that you should look out for is Dove.They specialize in the personal care and body care products. Some of their products are conditioners, soaps, and body washes. Their body washes give you adequate hydration and effective skin cleansing.
The next brand is one that was founded in 2003. It’s called The Soap Story. They are keen about offering fresh, exciting and original soapy products. You can trust that they use top-notch ingredients for their products. They produce fine fragrance mists, body washes, and bath bombs. One interesting thing about this brand is that they named their body washes with attractive names like; Heavenly, Zesty, Sunrise, Tickled pink, etc.
In 2007, another good brand was introduced and they offer active care products for both men and women. The name of the brand is Fiama Di Wills and their collection of body wash includes Lemon Grass, Blackcurrant and Brazilian Orange.
In 1960, Fabindia came into existence thanks to John Bissell. They produce beautiful body wash that includes Citrus Lemon variants, Green Tea, and Silk.
Nivea is another fantastic brand that was introduced in Germany as far back as 1911. They are a body care and skin brand. In as much as they provide an enormous collection of products for men and women, they ensure that their products are free of aluminum and alcohol. Their body wash range provides Pure Impact, Lemon and Oil, Firangipani and Oil, and Crème care.
Himalaya is a brand that was founded in 1930. Asides producing health-related products and medicines; they produce body wash that is effective as well as affordable.
The last but not the least is Biotique. This is another company that detests animal testing hence, their packaging is eco-friendly and recyclable. Their body wash is made from herbs that help eliminate skin ailments. Biotique’s range includes options like Honey Cream, Sea Kelp, and Apricot.
The Nivea Mens Odor protect isn’t just a good, but the fantastic choice for those that love a body wash that keeps the skin moisturized the whole day and a multipurpose body wash that has the ability to cover all the bases.
When you purchase a bottle of this body wash that weighs 1.2 lbs, it doesn’t just clean and deeply moisturizes your skin but it doubles as a shampoo too. Hence, this bottle can pass for your whole shower routine. Another thing about this product is the scent.
The scent is something that would make you want to stick to it because it’s dubbed as having an ocean burst scent. Well, they didn’t just write odor control on the pack for nothing. It actually controls odor and the silver ions in the body wash alongside the ocean burst scent work together to achieve this aim effortlessly.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The Every Man Jack body wash is one that is new to the market but it has been able to build a good reputation for itself in a short time. A bottle of this body wash weighs 0.64 lbs and the ingredients that were put together to produce it is quite effective.
This body wash contains essential oils like castor oil, rosemary oil, and clary sage oil. These oils are very effective in hydrating your skin even if you had a hard day at work and it also rejuvenates your skin as well. If you’re a man with a sensitive skin, this body wash is a good choice for you because the essential oils give contained in it provides non-comedogenic properties that prevent your pores from clogging.
When you squeeze a bit of this body wash on your palms, it moderately foams and produces the masculine scent you desire. Regardless of the fact that this product is oil based, it leaves no oil layer behind when you use it. Also, this product doesn’t contain any type of synthetic dye.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The Art Naturals Mens body is a good choice for men with sensitive skin because it’s pure and gentle. This body wash weighs 0.93 Lbs with tea tree oil in it. In case you don’t know, tea tree oil helps to preserve the natural texture of your skin because it has anti-fungal features.
This brand also combines other useful ingredients like eucalyptus oils, peppermint, and oregano which all contribute to making your skin refreshed and healthy. This product is totally safe to be used on your hands, feet, body, and nails. This is because it has no chemicals and it cleans your skin thoroughly.
When you go through strenuous activities, you sweat a lot and this attracts fungi and bacteria. This is why this product would be very useful. In addition, it lathers up into fragrant foam that’s responsible for making your skin feel revitalized, hydrated, fragrant, and supple.
Check Product Price // Read More Review
When you take a good look at this body wash that weighs 6.0 Lbs, you can tell that the brand has infused strong scents into it and a rich foaming lather that would help you stay fresh all day long.
The swagger version of the old spice body wash is a product to look out for because it lathers a lot when you use a loofah. When you use this product it leaves you smelling really nice. You don’t have to worry about irritation because using this product doesn’t cause irritation or dryness to your skin.
This body wash is effective in cleaning dirt from your body and it leaves you with a lingering scent that is noticeable. Using this product helps you clean your pores and finally seals them with moisture.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The Old Spice Denali wash weighs 1.22 Lbs and it’s obvious that they did their research properly before going ahead with launching the Fresher collection.
They went as far as partnering with a leading research firm to determine if the scent of the Fresher collection could actually calm the body and mind. This was what brought about the five scents that include; Citron, Denali, Timber, and Fiji.
This amazing body wash smells great and lasts for a whole day. It’s no surprise though because they’ve been in the business for quite a long time. Thus, their scent is appreciated by so many men due to its distinctiveness.
You’ll be impressed with how well the body wash lathers and does a good job removing odor. It also cleans out sweat and dirt quickly which is what you need to stay confident while you go about the day’s business or hit the gym.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
From the color of the bottle of this anti-fungal tea tree based body wash you can tell that it’s a natural body wash. When it comes to cleaning your skin, this body wash will help ward off any form of grime on your body after the day’s work.
There is an emphasis on it being a body and foot wash because it contains tea tree oil that acts as a natural antiseptic to combat any bacteria that causes odor as well as foot odor, jock itch, and any kind of funguses.
If you’re a consumer that is animal-tested conscious, you’d be happy with this product because it’s cruelty-free. Hence, all its ingredients are gotten from plants. This body wash also contains peppermint oil that helps control acne, brighten, and tone your skin.
The eucalyptus oil in this body wash helps to disinfect skin. It also serves as an anti-inflammatory and antibacterial. Hence, using this body wash would heal the skin of any inflammation or irritation. Asides its medical benefits, it helps to moisturize and nourish the skin the whole day.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
If you’re in search of a luxurious body wash that has a manly “woodsy” smell with the ability to expose your inner lumberjack without smelling completely overpowering, then this body wash would mark all the checkboxes on your list.
Asides the fact that this body wash smell good due to the mixture of mahogany and bourbon vanilla, it contains ingredients that would make your skin glow and adequately nourished. This product weighs 0.60 lbs and it contains Shea butter that helps condition the skin. It also contains Vitamin E that helps prevent dryness of the skin and aloe vera that gives your skin all the necessary nutrients it requires.
No doubt, buying this product is a good investment for your skin and it doesn’t leave any oily film when you’re done with your shower.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The manufacturers of this great product nailed it when then they created a blend of Bourdon and Cedar to produce this all in one men’s body wash. This product will do good justice to your body, face and hair giving you that relaxed feeling after a hectic day at work without drying out your scalp or skin.
The bottle of the Olivina Bourbon Cedar All-in-one body wash comes with an absolute sleek black mannish design that makes it hard for your girlfriend or wife to make use of it in the shower mistakenly. At one glance of the bottle, you’ll notice that it reflects luxury and a masculine feel that can’t be hidden.
This men’s body wash can register perfectly as an exfoliating cleanser, considering the fact that it has a perfect blend of smoky vanilla with some shots of red cedar. This men’s body wash is also absolutely free of chemicals such as; phthalates, sodium lauryl sulfate, silicones, and paraben. This, however, makes it the perfect choice for sugar scrubbing (just as it was stated earlier in this post).
It’s certain that your girlfriend or wife will love you more for using this body wash.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The duo of Matt Bolduc and Josh Meyer started up the company that makes this invigorating mint men’s body wash. Their mission was simple: “produce top-notch men’s body wash product that every bloke will die to have.” Apparently, these co-founders have been able to accomplish this mission with their Brickell men’s body wash. Before they started their business, they discovered a great need in the men’s grooming business, and it has paid out for their customers and them today.
Just Like big tech companies like Apple and Google, this company started in a garage but today it’s producing quality men products that are used in at least 20 different countries. No wonder, the Brickell men’s invigorating mint body wash is ranking as one of the best men’s body wash today.
The natural ingredients such as vitamin E, tea tree oil, aloe vera, jojoba oil, and glycerin makes the body wash a great option for any man that has any type of skin texture; coarse or sensitive. The functions of its organic ingredients can’t be over-emphasized as it ensures your skin receives the perfect nutrients it needs to glow and flourish.
The men’s body wash lathers so well on your skin that it engages in an intense deep cleansing, which leaves your skin fresh and clean from all the grime and unseen germs hiding on your skin after you get back from a hectic day’s job.
Another great feature that comes with this men’s body wash is the minty feeling that it leaves you with after your shower. This can be quite relaxing and rejuvenating enough to give you a good head-start for the day. You can also wash your hair with this body wash and be assured that it won’t dry your scalp.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
This men’s body wash will surely give you the best value for your money. No wonder, it’s renowned for being one of the best men’s body wash in the world. No doubt, you will get a double treat for both your body and soul when you use the Axe men’s body wash with a unique fragrance that clearly distinguishes it from many others.
The Axe men’s body wash has a strong woody fragrance that is designed to keep you feeling all fresh at least 12 hours around the clock, giving you that confidence you desire all through the day.
The 16-fluid-ounce bottled body wash comes with a strong cleaning power that is suitable for men that have sensitive or complex skin texture. Thus, it easily lathers when it comes in contact with your body. Also, it contains natural ingredients such as; caramel, hazelnuts, perfumery extracts, black basil, coriander leaves, black pepper, and coconuts which help keep your skin free from germs and revitalized all day long.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
From the name, Puracy natural body wash, you can guess what this men’s body wash will do to your skin. Your skin will surely enjoy purity and freshness by using this men’s body wash. This body wash will work perfectly for any type of skin texture because of the beautiful blend of sea salt and citrus which goes down as a lovely combination that will keep your body ever-fresh all day long.
This body wash doesn’t have any sort of sulfates, thus it’s a little bit difficult for it to lather as other of its counterparts. The absence of the sulfates, however, makes it suitable for people with sensitive or complex skin texture. In addition, you can be sure that the absence of artificial fragrances will keep your skin from any sort of irritations.
Coco glycinate is a coconut-based surfactant that helps prevent your skin from having any form of irritation, redness or dryness. The good news is that this men’s body wash has it as one of its main constituents.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
If you want to smell all day like a perfect bloke, then this will be the perfect choice for you. The Cremo all-season men’s body wash features a more distinguished men’s body wash for the contemporary gentleman. The body wash has a superb moisturizing formula which is quite rich with an excellent and unique fragrance.
This body wash was produced by some of the top scent global specialists. No wonder, they were able to come up with top-notch fragrances that are multifaceted and luxurious. The beautiful fragrance from the body wash opens up as you pour some of its mild formulae in the shower.
The Cremo all-season men’s body wash is more than a body wash; it’s a multi-dimensional fragrance experience.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
If you can picture yourself being hydrated by an intense waterfall, then you’ve definitely gotten the feeling of having the Irish Spring Moisture Blast men’s body wash walk through your skin in the shower. It’s nothing short of the intense waterfall, only more refreshing.
The Irish Spring Moisture Blast men’s body wash is made to enrich and nourish your skin. It also preserves the natural moisture of your skin. This awesome men’s body wash has an odor defusing system that helps keep you smelling fresh 24 hours round the clock.
If you want to nurture your skin with a gush of moisture as you take on that hectic job every day, then getting the Irish Spring Moisture Blast men’s body wash, should be of uttermost importance to you.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The Bath and Body Work Paris is an awesome men’s body wash that every bloke should have in their bathroom. Using this men’s body wash will give you an adventurous and captivating feeling that will send your soul and body to perfect relaxation, “like a vacation to Paris,” after a tough and long day at work.
The men’s body wash is made from a premium combination of orange zest, a hint of musk, and cedar wood. The body wash will gently go through your hair or work on your skin giving you that perfectly fresh and fragrant shower feeling.
The Bath and Body Work Paris has a healthy and luxurious mix of the world’s best ingredients specially designed for men, like the Shea Butter, Aloe Vera and Vitamin E that work together to make your skin refreshed and beautiful.
The body wash has the perfect lather you need to thoroughly cleanse your body, with a rapid rising formula that leaves your skin clean and safe.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
You may probably want to choose a premium men’s body wash that will give you your desired results of feeling clean and smelling fresh. However, it could get pretty confusing with the long list of choices available these days.
Thus, it’s best you make your choice based on the ones that are perfect for your skin, especially if you have a sensitive one. However, it’s certain that you can go ahead to make your choice after going through this review.
CHECK PRICE <a class="btn" href="https://www.amazon.com/Logitech-Anywhere-Wireless-Cross-Computer-Control/dp/B071VK5KXN”>READ REVIEWS
To shake things up a little, our next feature is a mouse, but it isn’t a mouse. Confused? Don’t worry! Apple has innovatively produced their Magic Trackpad 2 to compete with the conventional mouse design. This sleek and stylish pad automatically connects to your MacBook, allowing you to get stuck into replying to important emails from the outset.
Unlike their previous model, this one has a more convenient battery setup and has improved touch capabilities. Inside this clean-surfaced and eye-catching product, there are four exceptional sensors. These sensors cover the whole surface, which means users can click anywhere and get the same efficient response.
On top of that, these sensors are programmed to effectively determine the amount of pressure used. By registering the exact pressure used, this trackpad can accurately decipher your intended command. You’ll never get frustrated with your MacBook again!
The combination of two other features on this cool mouse replacement makes it even more user-friendly. It has been designed a little larger than its predecessor and given a lower profile. This lets you scroll and surf the web in a simpler manner every time!
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
Probably one of the most peculiar MacBook mice you will ever see, the Anker Vertical Mouse is certainly a sight to behold. If you’re a guy with sore fingers or wrists after a day hard at work, this could be your savior!
If you’re looking at it unsure how it’s supposed to be held – we did the same at first. It encourages a healthy grip that is somewhat similar to a handshake. This reduces pressure on certain areas and keeps your position neutral and healthy.
There is nothing like it on the market and we reckon it will be a great position to use for shooting games too!
The optical tracking technology inside this mouse goes beyond the industry standard. Owners can choose between three settings of 800 DPI, 1200 DPI, and 1600 DPI so it can adapt to different surfaces, as well as user preference.
Yet, two of the most innovative inclusions are a back button and a next button that has been conveniently added onto the mouse. Another convenience with this model is that it will activate sleep mode on its own after eight minutes of idle use.
Any button will wake it back up ready for the day ahead. All are provided with an 18-month warranty for your peace of mind.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
If you want a mouse for a MacBook that has many crucial features at an affordable price, you want the Bluecell Wireless USB mouse. It will connect to your precious MacBook safely and efficiently by using a USB receiver. The receiver has a small design that is intended to be inserted once and left in place for the long haul.
This means no fiddling after every use!
The Bluecell mouse is powered by one single AA battery, although this battery does not come with the product. When you have packed up shop for the day, simply hit the sleep mode on the mouse to save battery and increase the length of time between having to replace the battery.
It uses optical tracking to enhance its performance on many different surfaces. Moreover, the mouse will never have you nursing an aching wrist because it has been designed with the natural shape of both the left and right hand in mind. It fits your resting hand position so you do not strain your fingers or wrist during extensive use.
One other cool feature on this design is that it glows red when in use. For night owl workers and gamers, this is a nice addition!
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
Approaching the halfway stage of the best mice for a MacBook is another Logitech model. The M585 Multi-Device Wireless Mouse is a great option for savvy MacBook owners. It’s another mouse that provides the option of connecting with devices via a unifying receiver, or by using Bluetooth technology.
Yes, you read that correctly – plural! This mouse will simultaneously connect with up to three different MacBooks. Most people don’t own three MacBooks but that doesn’t mean you can’t connect it to your MacBook and maybe a Windows device as well!
Connecting to multiple laptops and desktops at one time improves productivity and saves on desk space. Easily access three screens with a single mouse by flicking between them in super quick time. Unlike some of Logitech’s other mice for MacBooks, this one does not have a rechargeable battery.
Instead, it accepts one AA battery. Don’t let this put you off too much because a single battery in this MacBook mouse will have it performing for a staggering two years!
The mouse has been made to avoid pains and aches. It has a dome shape to naturally slide underneath both your right or left hand comfortably. That’s your palm taken care of, but what about your scrolling finger? The scrolling wheel in the center of the mouse has more grooves per one millimeter.
More grooves enable you to comfortably scroll through documents and web pages easier and faster.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The final Apple product on our buyer guide is another undeniably impressive option. It’s an early departure from Apple but they’re leaving us with a spectacular MacBook mouse option. It will be love at first sight for a lot of MacBook owners. This is one of the sleekest and attractive MacBook mice on the market to date.
It goes beyond the standard levels of optical tracking for accurate browsing and cursor movements due to laser technology. Obtaining such performance is made seamless because it will connect and stay connected with your MacBook using reliable Bluetooth.
The range of its Bluetooth connectivity is a phenomenal 33 feet. So, you can glide around the boardroom while managing the content of your big screen at all times.
The aspect of this mouse for a MacBook which really makes it stand out is how it functions. This is thanks to miniature sensors which pick up the subtlest of actions and commands. The commands it recognizes are the standard commands used on any of their laptops.
This means you won’t have to adapt to using the mouse at all. The typical commands we’re referring to include standard clicking, which can be done at any point on the mouse; as well as scrolling and swiping with two fingers.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The final Apple product on our buyer guide is another undeniably impressive option. It’s an early departure from Apple but they’re leaving us with a spectacular MacBook mouse option. It will be love at first sight for a lot of MacBook owners. This is one of the sleekest and attractive MacBook mice on the market to date.
It goes beyond the standard levels of optical tracking for accurate browsing and cursor movements due to laser technology. Obtaining such performance is made seamless because it will connect and stay connected with your MacBook using reliable Bluetooth.
The range of its Bluetooth connectivity is a phenomenal 33 feet. So, you can glide around the boardroom while managing the content of your big screen at all times.
The aspect of this mouse for a MacBook which really makes it stand out is how it functions. This is thanks to miniature sensors which pick up the subtlest of actions and commands. The commands it recognizes are the standard commands used on any of their laptops.
This means you won’t have to adapt to using the mouse at all. The typical commands we’re referring to include standard clicking, which can be done at any point on the mouse; as well as scrolling and swiping with two fingers.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
What a way to be introduced to the nice work by Jelly Comb! Their slim wireless mice for MacBooks are flying off the shelves and there are reasons for that! Not only are there countless color options and the option to buy them in pairs, but you can also even get one with an American flag design.
Although, this MacBook mouse doesn’t need 52 of them to be declared a star in its own right! This is a wireless mouse to free up space on your home and office desk. It will seamlessly connect to your MacBook – or even a Windows model – with ease by using a receiver and an AA battery.
The connection will always remain stable within a more-than-adequate 15-meter vicinity. This is enough to cater for your home office and for wireless meeting room use. It will save battery without effort too. When left for eight minutes, it will automatically put itself to sleep.
If only the kids would do the same! This saves you battery and can be easily restarted with the click of any button.
One of the most unique features on this mouse for a MacBook is a simple addition, but yet to be encountered elsewhere. The click is silent which prevents you from annoying colleagues and being left out of the morning coffee run. It also keeps you in your wife’s good books as she catches up on her favorite series.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
A second great Jelly Comb model is their rechargeable mouse. As the name suggests, this one differs from their other feature because you don’t need to hunt down for disposable batteries to get it running. When looking at this model, you could easily mistake it for one of Apple’s own.
It makes use of white and silver colors along with rounded sleek and clean edges. Overall, it’s one of the most attractive mice for a MacBook and will certainly not look out of place next to any Apple device.
This mouse has been made to produce less noise as you click through your online order or work away towards the imminent deadline. Another awesome capability of this model is its sensitivity settings. Many of our earlier features didn’t allow users to tailor their creations as much so try not to overlook this cool addition.
Owners of the Jelly Comb Rechargeable Wireless Mouse can pick between three DPI settings, so you can browse and work at your own pace. Overall, this is a solid choice at a friendly price.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The earlier Jelly Comb mouse was limited in the types of Apple products it would connect to. It was not suitable for MacBooks with a type-C port. They’ve now filled that void by creating a wireless mouse for a MacBook that is a perfect fit for MacBook type-C ports.
This includes 12-inch MacBooks and is a great mouse for a MacBook Pro made in the last few years. The mouse comes with a cable that lets you effortlessly recharge your mouse – even while you’re working!
To pair the mouse with your MacBook, all you need to do is add the receiver to the mouse and attach the other receiver to the port on your MacBook. It’s as easy as that! Once done, you will stay connected within an impressive 15-meter range.
The inside of the mouse is run by a nest of fairies and wizards. Not exactly, but when you hear about its specs you can be forgiven for thinking that way. An optical laser keeps an accurate track of movements for smooth and quick responses.
The user can adapt this tracking to their preferences by switching the mouse’s sensitivity between 800 DPI, 1200 DPI, and 1600 DPI. This cool mouse is super lightweight for ease of transportation, it’s as quiet as a, well, mouse – and anatomically designed for comfort.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The earlier Jelly Comb mouse was limited in the types of Apple products it would connect to. It was not suitable for MacBooks with a type-C port. They’ve now filled that void by creating a wireless mouse for a MacBook that is a perfect fit for MacBook type-C ports.
This includes 12-inch MacBooks and is a great mouse for a MacBook Pro made in the last few years. The mouse comes with a cable that lets you effortlessly recharge your mouse – even while you’re working!
To pair the mouse with your MacBook, all you need to do is add the receiver to the mouse and attach the other receiver to the port on your MacBook. It’s as easy as that! Once done, you will stay connected within an impressive 15-meter range.
The inside of the mouse is run by a nest of fairies and wizards. Not exactly, but when you hear about its specs you can be forgiven for thinking that way. An optical laser keeps an accurate track of movements for smooth and quick responses.
The user can adapt this tracking to their preferences by switching the mouse’s sensitivity between 800 DPI, 1200 DPI, and 1600 DPI. This cool mouse is super lightweight for ease of transportation, it’s as quiet as a, well, mouse – and anatomically designed for comfort.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
We’re going to finish our run through of the best mice for a MacBook by taking a look at the HaloVa Wireless Mouse. It’s another unusual design that many will not believe is actually a MacBook mouse. Don’t worry if the rose gold color is not for you.
You can also buy it in gold, black and silver colors too. One of the most lucrative features is the alloy smooth surface. This surface results in less noise which will be a welcome addition to most office workers.
It has rechargeable batteries which are fully refueled after a minuscule 3-5 hours of charging time. There are no sensitivity options here, but it does have an above-standard sensitivity rating of 1600 dots per inch. It’s compatible with many types of devices including most Apple laptops and desktops.
Overall, we think this is a great buy and a gem within a crowded MacBook mouse market! It’s made even more of a hidden gem when you find out that the manufacturers are selling it with a 90-day return period and a lifetime warranty!
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
That’s all from us here at Men’s Gear! We have scrolled our way through some of the best mice for a MacBook currently on the market. It’s surprising how something which may appear so one-dimensional can, in fact, have many different features.
This makes finding the best MacBook mouse a little more tricky.
By featuring the likes of Logitech, Jelly Comb and Apple’s very own mice – and mice replacements – we hope we have made your decision that little bit easier. You may have seen one you really like – that’s great! It’s worth hitting our links and finding out a little more about them.
Check out the reviews and some more of the details before making a choice. Thanks for checking out our post and come back to us soon for more phenomenal gear, for the modern man!
I
n 1989, during the “Hotter N Hell 100” cycling competition, Michael Eidson was one of the cyclers competing for the 100-mile cycle race. No doubt, the name “Hotter N Hell 100,” was no coincidence as the summer at Wichita Falls was producing an excruciating heat that was absolutely giving the competitors a tough time.
Consequently, the heat of the sun was becoming unbearable for the cyclers as they rode down the track. The cyclers kept pushing their pedals as the cheering crowd kept cheering them on, giving them the moral support they needed.
Approximately 15 minutes to the race, many of the cyclers were already getting dehydrated and weary because of the scoring heat of the sun.
By this time, most of the cyclers were already running out of water from their drinking flasks, thus putting most of them in a dilemma of slowing down to get water. This caused them to lose their track time or opt out of the race due to dehydration.
While almost all the cyclers were getting dehydrated and tired, one man was still pedaling, smiling and looking refreshed like he wasn’t part of the race.
This man, Michael Eidson kept pedaling and taking advantage of the weakness of his fellow counterparts. What and why exactly was this cycler, Michael Eidson doing that nobody else was doing?
Before the race started, Michael Eidson who was an emergency medical engineer, apparently got an IV bag filled with water and placed in a white tube sock, which had a straw for sucking. He wore the IV bag like a bag pack.
Meanwhile, many of his competitors who saw him before the race had a good laugh at him. They thought he was actually crazy to be doing that. However, what they didn’t know that being “crazy and unique” could be great sometimes.
Thus, Michael Eidson had enough water to keep him all through the race more than any person that competed with him in the race. You obviously know how the story ended. That very day marked the birth of a new idea, “the hydration pack.”
From then on, manufacturers of sports equipment began to add the hydration pack to part of their production list.
Fast forward today, many mountain hikers, cyclers, kayakers, and even military personnel in desert-terrain countries use the hydration packs to store a large volume of water that can be hung on the shoulders to cover long distances.
Thus, if you’re reading this post, you can be one hundred percent sure that you will get a comprehensive list of the top 10 hydration packs available on the market today. Thus, hang on here to get furnished with all you need to know.
Oh, we forgot to say that all those guys who laughed at Eidson that day will probably have at least one hydration pack, that’s if they’re still cycling.
Of course, you know by now that hydration packs are indeed helpful for a sportsman or woman that engages in long distant outdoor-sports. However, we won’t be out of place to know exactly how the hydration packs we use actually work.
No doubt, any hydration pack you see today can either be in the form of a waist pack or a backpack, which is just akin to the form of a fanny pack. The pack functions by possessing a rubber or plastic “bladder” which is equally occupied with any liquid of your choice, which of course is water most times.
The “fluid bladder” in the hydration pack comes with a small cap which helps in filling up the container with fluid.
There is also a hose attached to the bladder, which is used to suck out and consume the fluid in the bladder. The hose has an extension that runs all the way from the container, over your shoulders to a point where it reaches your mouth without the help of your hands.
Also, most of the hydration packs available on the market come with a hose that has a bite valve. When the valve is bitten by you, the water runs from the hydration pack through the hose into your mouth. Thus, the bite valve acts as a controller or water knob stopper. It all depends on what you choose to call it.
These days, we find a lot of people looking to get hydration packs that are self-cleaning or don’t need cleaning. The bad news; regardless of the type of hydration pack you have, cleaning is actually inevitable. There are different methods you can use to clean your hydration pack.
All you need to do is choose the most convenient method or combine other methods alongside to ensure that molds and bacteria don’t make your hydration pack their home.
The first method involves placing your hydration pack in a dishwasher that’s safe. In case you’re not sure if you have a dishwasher that’s safe, it’s best to go through the manual and ensure you follow the company’s recommendations.
This process seems quite convenient due to the fact that you leave all the work to the dishwasher but the truth; this method is best used as a preventive measure against mold and bacteria because the machine doesn’t give the hydration pack thorough cleaning.
The next method involves the use of denture-cleaning tablet and bleach. This method is quite effective, plus you don’t have to worry about it affecting the material of your hydration pack. Before being skeptical about this method, it would interest you to know that this method isn’t just neat but easy as well.
All you need to do is fill your bladder with water and place about one or two denture tablets. Once this is done, you’ve to allow the tablets to settle for some time in the reservoir, then massage the bladder and drain the water.
When the water is completely drained from the bladder, fill it up with warm water again and add about two tablespoons of bleach and repeat the previous process and you have yourself a clean pack. However, you can use only bleach if you don’t have denture-cleaning tablets.
If you have a thing for using natural things to clean, then the lemon method should interest you. When you use lemon juice, the citric acid in it helps to prevent the antimicrobial activities. However, this method is most effective when your hydration pack isn’t already infested with mold.
Hence, it’s best to use this method as a preventive measure rather than an effective method of cleaning. Using this method requires you to rinse your pack thoroughly to avoid a sticky residue, then you place the bladder in the freezer after you’re done.
The last method involves the use of baking soda and warm water. All you need to do is fill up your pack with warm water and add two tablespoons of baking soda. Allow this mixture to sit for a while and drain the pack.
If you’re in search of a method that is remedying and preventive, then this is the best method. When you use this method, it won’t have any harmful effect on your hydration pack; rather it would do a good job of cleaning it thoroughly.
Once you have carried out any of these methods, the concluding part is hanging the hydration pack on a wire hanger to dry properly. If you place your pack in the freezer, you won’t need to hang it out on a wire hanger.
Before purchasing a hydration pack, there are things that you should put into consideration. Since there are different hydration packs for different activities, you have to know what activity you want to buy the pack for.
This is because a hiking hydration pack is specially built to have sufficient cargo space for storing food and extra layers for placing other important things that would be needed. A cyclist hydration pack is totally different from the previous with it’s low-profile and compact design for stability on your back, wind resistance and lightweight.
These packs usually feature low-profile waist belts to prevent pedaling interference. Also, there are running hydration packs. These kinds of packs usually have a low-profile design, a hydration reservoir, alongside very accessible pockets to keep extra food and clothes.
If you’re involved in snow sports, it’s best to go for the snow sport hydration packs. They are specially designed to prevent your water supply from freezing. It may also have carry strips to permit hands-free transport of your ski.
Another thing you should consider is the capacity of the hydration pack. This is important because you have to be sure about how much water you can carry and if you can refill the pack along the way.
Capacities of three liters or more are ideal for those that easily get thirsty or don’t have plans to refill along the way. If you choose a hydration pack with a larger capacity, you’d have to be ready to carry the weight that comes with it.
Two liters or 2.5-liters is a good choice for those that need to refill occasionally and can carry reasonable weight. If you’re a short-distance bike commuter, hiker, minimalist, or a kid, the one or 1.5-liters capacity will be ideal. The 0.5-liters capacity or less is ideal for lightweight pursuits like walking.
The capacity of the hydration pack gear is another thing you should put into consideration. This ranges from less than 5-liters to 50-liters. Your choice, in this case, should depend on the space needed to carry your personal effects.
If you need load-support features, a lot of cargo room alongside comfort, then the 21-liters capacity and above will be ideal. If you prefer to stay organized with extra pockets, the 6 to 10-liters capacity would be ideal.
If not, the compact and low-profile design with a capacity of 5-liters or less for carrying a few things would be perfect. As long as you plan to use the hydration packs for a long time, then you’d have to consider the durability by checking the materials they are made of and the online reviews like the one you\re getting here.
Ventilation is another thing to put into consideration to ensure that your items are in the best conditions. Some hydration packs come with holes while others may come with a breathable mesh to enhance ventilation.
This leak-proof water reservoir weighs 0.44 lbs and is made of premium anti-bacterial material. When you use this hydration pack, you don’t have to worry about your drink having a bad taste because it’s taste free. This pack is also BPA free and non-toxic.
It’s no surprise that this pack has all the features because it’s tested to comply with international safety standards.
Apart from this pack being pressure tolerant, it has double sealing side technique. This technique contributes to improving its durability. The water bladder has the ability to withstand temperatures between -20 to 500C due to its insulated tubes that repels temperature changes in cold and hot weathers.
When you want to suck water, all you need to do is bite the mouthpiece and pull the valve. From the name of this pack, you can guess that it’s actually leak proof and this is due to its soft mouthpiece that has an accessible on and off valve.
Filling and cleaning this pack is quite easy thanks to its big opening that allows bottle brushes or a wide hand to easily access the interior part of the bladder. It also has a liner in it that’s quite smooth and inhibits germ and lime from adhesion.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The Vibrelli hydration pack is a lightweight bladder that uses quality water bladder technology. This pack weighs 0.80 lbs and it’s made from taste-free bladder film. It’s certain that nobody wants a pack that leaks, thereby adding to your sweat when you’re carrying out your sporting activities.
That’s why the manufacturers created a shut-off bite valve to ensure that the pack doesn’t leak.
When it comes to ventilation this pack comes with a breathable mesh to ensure that items you put in it are in good condition. It comes with an insulated water bladder and hose to keep your water in the right temperature regardless of the weather.
If you need to carry additional items like jackets or helmets, the pack has external bungee straps and key attachment clip to keep your items secure. When you have to drink, the bladder has a quick click and go hose retainer. This makes it quite easy for you to drink on the go.
As regards being fit, the Vibrelli has waist and chest straps that are adjustable hence; you can adjust it to fit you perfectly. In case of an emergency, the pack has a safety whistle in one of its belt clips that could come in handy.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
If you’re looking for a hydration pack that is wear-proof and pressure-tolerant then the WACOOL hydration pack is the perfect choice for you. It comes with a 0.6 mm extra thick liner and double soldering sealing side technique that enhances its durability.
You can take your mind off from having your water taste of plastic because this hydration pack is made of BPA-Free EVA material that contributes to making your water completely tasteless and odorless.
Refilling this hydration pack is quite easy because it has a double design large opening with a tight seal. It’s also easy to clean because of its design. When you go hiking, you can carry as much water as you desire in this hydration pack bladder because it has a capacity of 3-liters.
Even if this pack is under a 60-kilogram pressure, the double soldering seal prevents it from leaking. When you’re done drinking water with the mouthpiece, it has a self-lock that stops it from leaking and a dust cover to protect it from dirt and dust particles.
Another interesting feature of this pack is its glass-like interior that helps prevent any sediment.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
This is another BPA free hydration pack that weighs 2.0 lbs. This pack doesn’t just have a lightweight but it’s quite comfortable and comes with adjustable features that make it perfect for any kind of adventure.
The hydration pack has a capacity of 2-liters for water with a hidden-teeth zipper, large pockets, and a weather guard. With this feature, there’s no need to worry about your food, clothes, or gear because it will be protected.
The Teton hydration pack was designed to fit any frame comfortably and you can decide to wear this pack all day long without any discomfort. This is due to its high-density notched foam stabilizer and comfort-taped straps with mesh covering.
The overall capacity of this pack is about 18-liters. This means you can comfortably pack your necessary belongings alongside your water without any issues.
The Teton sports hydration pack has a sewn-in rain cover located at the bottom of the pack that helps protect and keeps it dry. If you’re cycling or hiking and you desire to limit the bounce from your pack, simply use the multiple compression straps to tighten your pack down.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The Teton sports trailrunner weighs 0.9 lbs and it’s perfect for activities like hiking, running and cycling. While you’re at it, this pack allows you to store up to 2-liters of water. The bladder is made of BPA free material that ensures your water is void of any kind of chemical taste.
If you choose to put ice cubes in the pack, its 2-inch opening makes it easy. It also has a push-lock cushioned bite valve and kink-free sip tube that makes drinking from the valve quite easy. In case of an emergency, you can make use of the built-in orange whistle, strap clips to keep extra straps protected and a reflective trim that is necessary for night safety.
The pack can be used by anybody because of its low-profile athletic cut that has full adjustment fits for any kind of frame as well as an adjustable waist belt for increased stability and comfort.
Storing small essentials is not a big deal with this pack because of its deep front pocket and bungee storage.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
If you have a passion for hiking or cycling, especially for covering long distances, this hydration pack will be a perfect choice for you. You can comfortably extinguish your thirst with the Baen Sendi 2 liters hydration pack.
Regardless of the terrain, whether it’s in the deserts of Saudi Arabia or the mountain heights of Mount Everest, this hydration pack will obviously not disappoint you.
The bladder of this hydration pack has a durable capacity to store 2 liters of water properly without any issues. The bottle of the hydration pack has a premium aquatic blue design which gives it that amazing cool feature, thereby keeping the water cool even under the hot scorching sun.
If you are a “green advocate,” you will definitely like this hydration pack because it’s formed from a TPU material that is eco-friendly and a BPA material that encourages good hygiene reducing the risk of the bladder to grow any form of mildew or mold.
The Baen Sendi 2 liters hydration pack has a wear-proof function plus its pressure-tolerant which makes it even more sturdy and long-lasting.
The opening of the bladder has a size of 3.54 inches wide which can enable you to drop some ice inside the bladder, which will preserve the coolness of your water for a long time. Also, a wide opening equally makes it quite easy for you to clean after use.
The strong nature of the elastic plastic is quite solid and sturdy which is not easily prone to damage, plus it’s susceptible to any sort of leakage. Thus, you can be sure that you will rock this one for quite a long time.
The Baen Sendi hydration pack can comfortably survive temperatures between -20 up to 50 degrees Celsius, and it comes with a dust cover which is also useful to enhance a greater performance. With this fantastic hydration pack, you can be sure to enjoy convenience when you are outdoors doing your long-distant sporting activity.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The Miracol hydration backpack is just the perfect, attractive and multipurpose equipment you need for your cycling, running, hiking, and other sporting activities. This accessory is quite portable and it’s suitable for both male and females because of its easy adjustability.
The hydration pack is made from nylon, which makes it less prone to wearing and tearing. Also, its water resistant nature makes it a good option even under the rain. The backpack is quite light in weight weighing just 1 lb, because of the material used in making it; it’s easy and comfortable for you to carry on your shoulders.
The harness straps of the hydration pack are quite sturdy, durable and soft which absolutely removes any form of discomfort for you while you’re carrying it.
You can easily adjust the chest and waist of this hydration pack with absolutely no stress.
Thus, you will discover that the backpack is quite comfortable for you because there is absolutely no wiggling or sliding when you are cycling, running or undergoing any sporting activity that will require the movement of your hands and legs.
In a case where you decide to go for a walk in your neighborhood, you can quickly remove the reservoir in the hydration pack and only make use of the backpack.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The Unigear hydration backpack comes with a trim and smooth design which is quite ultra-light and durable. This enables you to store enough water and accessories for every of your outdoor sporting activities ranging from; hiking, cycling, jogging in the park, or run marathons.
The hydration backpack has waist and chest straps that are quite adjustable, thus, making it comfortable and suitable for both male and female. The backpack has deep pockets for storing your wallet and snacks.
The backpack is made from a high-quality water-resistant material which makes it possible for the backpack to withstand any sort of outdoor activity even under the rain.
The backpack comes in a compact size of 16.5 x 8 x 6.0 inches, with shoulder straps that are quite adjustable. Its strap can perfectly suit kids or teenagers with a 27” chest size and adults, both men and women with a 50” chest size. The waist and chest straps are quite firm enough to ensure there is not bouncing or moving out of your arms while you’re in motion.
The Ultra-lightweight of this bag is because of its nylon-built material which is splash resistant. The bladder of the hydration pack, which is replaceable, can take up to 2 liters worth of fluid. Thus, you can store enough liquid to carry you all through your long-distant journey.
The bladder also has the ability to keep the water in it cool for a long time because of its airflow system.
The bladder also has a wide screw-on opening that can allow cubes of ices into it, which helps keeps the coolness of the fluid inside it. Thus, you can stay outdoors for up to 5 hours with your fluid having the fairly cool temperature.
The straps of this hydration backpack are quite sturdy; therefore they can withstand any form of wear and tear.
If you want to store your personal belongings like your bunch of keys, your iPhone, and any other important accessories while you race or cycle with this bag you can do it without having the bag weigh you down.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The Mubasel Hydration backpack is the perfect choice for anyone that wants to avoid any form of heaviness while running or cycling. Thus, it has a rather lightweight of 0.7lbs because it’s made from nylon.
However, it’s capable of storing up to 2-liters worth of liquid. It also has portable compartments where you can store your personal belongings. This hydration backpack can also be used as a support pillow when you go hiking and camping on the mountain as it will comfortably and withstand up to 132lb worth of weight.
Also, it passed the FDA test as a quality food grade hydration backpack. This is possible because it has no aftermath chemical taste or odor.
The hydration backpack also has a wide screw-on cap that can allow the entry of ice cubes. Also, its wide screw-on cap makes it easy for it to be cleaned.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The difference between this hydration pack and the one above is the insulation system. This Mubasel hydration pack has a better insulation system than the previous. Thus, it can keep your fluid cold for up to 5 hours long.
Apparently, you can cover long distances with this hydration pack and still have your water cold. It also has an approved FDA test. Thus, it’s quite hygienic enough to prevent any sort of mold over a period of time.
The hydration backpack has portable and sturdy storage pockets that will properly store all your belongings such as; phones, purse, clothes, keys, etc. You can even store more when you are cycling because it has a front stretch mesh compartment.
The bladder has a 100 percent leak-proof capacity because the screw-on cap is tightly fitted and can’t lose at any time because of the fitness of the screw-on knob.
The shoulder paddings of the backpack are quite padded and light, making it easy and comfortable for you to carry about without any stress. Thus, it’s solid and suitable for any of your outdoor sporting activities.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
It’s obvious that hydration packs have changed the way a lot of people approach biking, hiking, and other outdoor sporting events rather than the conventional plastic water bottles.
Thus, the hydration pack has brought more fun and convenience to a ton of out-doors sporting events. However, we believe this review will help you get the perfect hydration pack best fit your needs.
Y
ou don’t have to be a beer drinker or a pro mixologist to admire an attractive bottle opener. A beautiful beer bottle opener can come in handy as a gift to a loved one or even impress your friends and guests at your beach house party. Whatever the situation, a beautiful beer bottle as small as it is can make a big impression for you or your folks.
Catching up with old friends sometimes could be exciting especially when you all have some good memories together. As blokes, it will be absolutely boring to just sit down and laugh over old times without having anything to wet your taste buds. That’s why most guys have rounds of beer to refill them while they talk and laugh out loud at funny jokes.
However, little but not-negligible comes the beer bottle opener. Before we go further, just picture this.
You are at the entrance of a nightclub on a Friday night with friends and you guys are about to go in to have some fun to party all night. Apparently, you guys have been outside talking and laughing “at your not so funny jokes.” All this while there has been a midget-looking guy standing at the entrance, who affirms who goes in and who doesn’t. But you and your friends never notice him because he is not seen, right? After all who cares about that midget-looking guy?
Well, to break the bad news, you and your guys don’t enter because “Mr. Midget” says so. He calls the shot and he doesn’t want you guys entering. Reason? Yes! He thinks you guys didn’t give him the respect, rather you guys made him look like he wasn’t there because he is short.
Now that’s the story of “Mr. Beer Bottle opener.”
If you don’t give him his recognition, then you are not ready to down-in on your chilled beer.
That’s why we have decided to tell you about the top 18 bottle openers in 2018.
Are you ready? Gear up, keep reading and see where all these go.
This is a common question asked by many people. Because it’s one thing to just pick a bottle opener up randomly from the store, and it’s another thing to have a solid bottle opener that’ll last enough to be passed on to your kids.
So back to the question, paraphrasing a little; what are the features of a quality bottle opener?
The first thing to look at is obviously its functionality. A good beer opener should be able to carry out its task swiftly and fast. There are some beer openers that get weak over time and stall a lot when they are sent on a mission to “open sesame.” Thus, always look for a beer opener that opens your beer fast without stalling. The only way to find that out is to keep reading this post and you may be able to get something that’s worth buying.
Another thing you should watch out for is the portability and handling. You don’t want to buy something you can’t easily slip at the back pocket of your denim. Somewhat, you will need something quite handy and portable to carry around with nobody knowing you are with it.
The above two features are the primary features you should look out for. However, they are other secondary features like; design, color, dual-function etc. that some people prefer, especially if they’re giving it out as a gift.
A bottle opener is something that everybody has come across in a bar, party or anywhere that drinks are concerned. Back in the days, we didn’t have much of a choice because it was just the manual bottle openers that were available and everyone was happy with it even though using it meant you’d have to exert some sort of energy to conquer the process of uncorking.
With the advent of technology, things have improved and that includes bottle openers. Now we have automatic bottle openers. This technology has made it really difficult for us to choose between this two but with the advantages and disadvantages hanging on the necks of both bottle openers, you’d be left to weigh them and make a choice because it all depends on your preference.
Automatic openers sound like magic already so you should know by now that one of the top advantages of this kind of openers is that they are really easy to use. This means you don’t have to process the stress of exerting pressure before meeting your goal. All you need to do is hold it and position it and watch it work for you after pressing a button.
Another advantage is these kinds of bottle openers are less prone to breaking the corks. Oh yes! Since it has been programmed to do everything for you, it doesn’t do less or too much of what you require of it. For instance, if you use the automatic bottle openers, it drives into the cork with the right depth before pulling. As sweet as this looks, it has its disadvantage which is the fact that for you to use these, access to power is necessary in order for them to work. If you purchase the models that use a pressure system, you’d have to buy special components to use it which means more cost is added.
Manual openers involve some work but it has some advantages that may interest you one way or the other. One advantage of the manual opener is they don’t require any power source other than human energy to carry out its function. Another advantage is these openers are flexible hence you can use them to open bottles with modern neck styles and sizes.
Also, manual openers offer you other features for your convenience e.g. built-in foil cutters.one of the disadvantage of this type of openers is that you require strength and they are more prone to breaking as a result of the pressure applied. Since the manual bottle openers don’t have safeguards to shield, they may result in some safety concerns. With all said, there’s no one that’s better it all depends on what you’re looking for.
When you want to make or purchase a bottle opener, it’s not a bad idea to know the best material to use for it. But for you to know the best material for your bottle opener, you have to have an idea of the kind of bottle opener you want.
If you plan to buy one made with quality material, then it’s much easier but if you plan to make it then you have more work to do. Generally, the kinds of materials used for bottle openers are the ones that don’t break when it’s in use. Examples of such materials include metal alloys, steel, and any kind of durable and solid material that would stand the test of time.
On material reduces the risk of safety the other hand, if you’re creating one, you have to get the right materials like the ones listed above and proceed to other things like retaining the functional geometry and create fascinating pieces. If you choose to, you can also personalize. In summary, the bedrock of a good bottle opener is its material and a good concern.
You can be sure that the name of this bottle opener isn’t for nothing because it’s used by so many bartenders around the world. It’s that one bottle opener that comes to your aid in times of need. Each of the Bartender bottle openers has a dimension of 7 x 1.6 x 0.1 inches and weighs 0.51 Lbs hence you can carry it wherever you go without noticing it.
If you have no idea of the perfect gift for that special person, this bottle opener is more than a good idea because the quality of the bottle opener starts from the heavy duty stainless steel to the high-quality non-slippery rubber-coated handle. Hence, you won’t have to have any safety concerns with this product.
The icing on the cake is the fact that the company is so confident in the product thus, they give a full refund if by any chance you aren’t contented with the product. It would interest you to know that this bottle opener isn’t just FDA approved but it’s made with recyclable and eco-friendly materials.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The igoolee bottle opener promotes carelessness due to its pack of six quality bottle openers at an affordable price. This opener has a dimension of 7.2 x 1.9 x 0.6 inches with a collective weight of 1.04 lbs and an individual weight of 1.04 Lbs each.
This bottle opener is quite easy to use when it comes to opening drinks. This product can assure you durability due to the long-lasting stainless steel material that was used to produce it. When you’re done using the bottle opener, you can simply suspend the round hole located at the bottom of the handle.
If you’re not satisfied with the product, the company offers you an opportunity to return the product for no reason within 30 days of purchase.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
If you love to give out gifts then I expect you to be happy about this because you’re about to make 12 people happy by giving each of them high-quality vintage Rustic bottle openers that have a dimension of 4.7 x 3.5 x 2 inches with each of them weighing 0.16 Lbs.
This beautiful looking bottle opener doesn’t just open drinks easily, but it has a unique look and durability alongside. This fantastic vintage bottle opener is versatile. This means that it can be used anywhere by anybody from a caveman to a wealthy man in an expensive restaurant. Another feature that does justice to this bottle opener is the fact that it can be easily installed.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
If your list of preference for purchasing a bottle opener includes easy to use, portable, and cute then you’ve found a bottle opener. It weighs0.44 lbs and has a dimension of 4.8 x 3.8 x 2.2 inches. When you want to open any drink using this bottle opener, all you need to do is push down and “pop” goes the bottle sound as evidence that the drink is opened.
This bottle opener is a fantastic gift for any occasion to anyone especially for people that have arthritis. This opener works with speed and it opens bottles in a way that there’s no mutilation of the cork thanks to its cap catcher magnet. Hence, it can serve as a good cap collector.
In case you find yourself in a bottle opening competition, this opener can serve as the superpowers behind your success.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
This magnetic catcher bottle opener comes with a ready-to-use strong magnetic mounting. This bottle opener weighs 0.97 Lbs and has a dimension of 8 x 1 x 3.2 inches. The reason for the strong magnetic mounting is to help people that prefer to use one hand to operate bottle openers or wall mount.
Mere looking at it, you can tell that the bottle opener is made from Rubberwood hardwood. That’s not all; this bottle opener has the capacity to hold up to 50 beer caps. Its hand-finished with water-resistant lacquer and uses 100% upgraded Zinc Alloy opener.
For maximum protection, this bottle opener has a multi-step finishing process.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
Sometimes high quality is everything and this bottle opener spells it correctly with its weight 0f 0.6 Lbs and dimension of 3.1 x 2.6 x 1 inches.
With how beautiful it looks. It will stay beautiful because it doesn’t rust in any environment. It also helps to make the art of opening bottles really easy leaving no spill of your drink regardless
With this, you can decide to give it as a birthday gift. When you open the box of this bottle opener, it contains high-quality stainless steel screw on a mountable bottle opener. This helps to catch bottles with a powerful magnet and stainless steel mounting screws.
Most of all, it’s easy to use.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
This simple yet beautiful team-colored opener with a team logo on it weighs 0.20 Lbs with a dimension of 0.2 x 10 x 7.5 inches. This bottle opener is specially made with heavy-duty steel which assures you that you shouldn’t in anyway be worried about having safety concerns.
This bottle opener is coated with vinyl which qualifies it to be used as a gift to a Bartender friend or relative.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
This Bartender bottle opener from the name suggests that it was made for Bartenders but others can use it as well. If you have any events coming up like anniversary celebration, promotion, birthday, public relations planning, etc. This bottle opener is a good gift idea with its weight of 0.57 Lbs and dimension of 2 x 2 x 2 inches.
You can also buy these for yourself if you love wooden handle bottle openers. Because this particular bottle handle comes in a pack of 5, you can decide to have your openers evenly distributed in different places you deem fit to avoid being caught unawares.
These wooden handle bottle openers are good for opening drinks like cider, beer, etc. in your home or the bar.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
If you think that this BeautyMood bottle opener is for the Casino only then you’re mistaken because this beautifully crafted opener is for anybody that takes interest in it with its weight of 0.70 Lbs and dimension of 3.34 x 2.16 x 0.78 inches.
The spade shape that the bottle opener has in the middle is the magic behind the design. That is, the Ace-shaped hole is what is used to open drinks. This bottle opener can be slipped into little spaces like pockets easily due to how slim the opener is.
The BeautyMood is made up of stainless steel which signifies that it wouldn’t rust. Hence it’s a good gift for traveling, parties etc. since it comes in a pack of 8.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
If you are funny or you like to be funny and you never make people laugh, or you wish you were funny, then this “funny- looking” Pickle beer bottle opener is certainly for you especially if you are a lover of beer. From the shape, you can guess that the original inventor of this bottle opener has a special place for “pickles” in his heart.
One unique thing about this pickle looking beer bottle opener is the fact that it’s extremely flat. The flatness of this beer bottle opener brings back the old memories of “Motorola Razor” which made a lot of publications advertising their slim and extremely flat nature.
The Pickle beer bottle opener gives every Ricky and Morty fans a big laugh anytime they open their favorite beer. At least, it’s a lot better than having one boring looking beer bottle opener open your beer bottles without any excitement.
No doubt if you were having a bad day at work and you decided to chill out with some friends at the pub, one glance at this Pickle beer bottle open will obviously give you a smile.
This Pickle beer bottle opener is made out of stainless steel which is coated to deliver that durability you require.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
This PoptheTop bottle opener is a unique looking beer bottle opener that has a sleek aluminum exterior. The bottle opener has an awesome and professional steel system which makes it easy for you to pop the top of your beer bottle.
The no wrist-twist system of the PoptheTop Automatic beer opener will surely impress your party guests. It has a unique way of opening the beer bottle by just pushing it down to the bottle. Then it goes “poof.” The sound it makes when it opens a bottle of beer.
If you operate a bar, this bottle opener will obviously be a good tool for you. Its wrist-twist system makes it possible for it to open a large number of beer bottles in a short time. Thus, you can entertain your guests with the bottle opening skill. In fact, the aesthetics of this bottle opener is so attractive, that it can give your bar a unique and new look.
This beer bottle opener will also go as a good gift for your friends who are beer lovers.
Also if you are a collector of beer bottle caps, the PoptheTop bottle opener is a perfect choice for you. This is because the beer bottle caps are not bent by the bottle opener, rather it’s released from the bottle in its almost original form.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The Tuncily credit card survival tool is the perfect beer bottle opener for anyone that doesn’t like carrying tools or equipment around. This credit card bottle opener can be defined in one word; “portable.” The portability of this bottle opener is amazing. You can place it on your wallet when you’re out hiking, fishing, etc.
The beauty about this credit card bottle opener is its multi-functional use. It has other spaces on the tool that act as a flat screwdriver, a key holder and even more. You can always place this credit card bottle opener in your wallet.
Thus, whenever you’re in a place by chance and you’re offered a drink, rather than looking for screws, you can bring out the credit card bottle opener and begin to do justice to your bottle and other bottles.
As a matter of fact, the credit card bottle opener was made from a rare stainless steel that doesn’t rust so you can be sure that you’ll be having it as a companion in your wallet for a long time.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
This tool can be comfortably called “a double-edged sword.” This is because of its dual function both as beer bottle opener and a can opener too.
The American Metalcraft bottle opener can quickly, safely and easily open cans and beer bottles. This beer bottle opener and can opener is formed from a heavy-duty toughened stainless steel that is perfect for everyday use.
Whether you run a bar or not, this vintage bottle opener is something you should have always. Also, it comes with a hardwood handle which allows you to have a calm grip together with a stylish and simple look.
With this beer bottle opener, you’ll get a ton of leverages giving the fact that it doubles as both a beer bottle opener and can opener without any blunder. The American Metalcraft bottle and can opener have a length of 4.5 inch L.
The manufacturers of the beer bottle opener and can opener, American Metalcraft have been around for 70 years. No wonder they’re one of the leaders in the foodservice business for trend-focused and exclusive products.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
If you remember the funny pickle looking beer bottle opener, then you may be able to relate with this beer bottle opener properly.
This particular beer bottle opener has so many similarities with the Pickle as they’re both flat. The only main difference is the fact that Mr. Pickle has the visual representation of the pickle character.
The Heavy duty Stainless Steel flat bottle opener is a compact, slim and durable. It comes in very handy for the handler. It can be used to open flat bottles, while its opener is indented on its 2 sides.
Also, it comes in a set of two so you can be sure to have a good replacement if peradventure you lose one.
This beer bottle opener can serve as a perfect gift; birthday, wedding, anniversary and so on.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The Westmark’s Resealable beer bottle opener is manufactured by a German Kitchenware manufacturer, and it’s ranked as one of the best in the world today. The beer bottle opener is created by using high-quality durable steel. It also comes with a rubber surface that helps provides an airtight seal effect.
It’s quite easy to use the bottle opener. It can open a large variety of bottles; especially the beer bottles. It also opens plastic bottles and glass bottles easily. Also, it has an amazing feature of sealing your bottle after it has been opened. All you need to do is simply slide the bottle of beer under the glass brim and it will get sealed. Also, it’s quite simple to clean the beer bottle opener.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
Opening your drinks has just got mischievous.
With the Cap Gun launcher bottle opener, you can surely sway your friends and family. This attractive tiny bottle opener opens your beer bottle with marginal effort but also serves as a cap launcher.
Cap Gun launcher bottle opener is the perfect companion that you should never leave, with its projection that spans over 5 meters,
If you want to break the ice at any party, the Cap Gun bottle opener will be the perfect tool for you. Just ensure your target is totally unaware! You can just push the cap, target, shoot, then just relax and enjoy your chilled beer.
The Cap Gun launcher bottle opener comes with a suitable key chain appropriate for that quick impulsive takeoff.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
If you’re a sailing enthusiast, you may like this Yoption Anchor beer bottle opener. This anchor looking beer bottle opener is made from pure stainless steel that is impeccable for opening any beer bottle as well as wine bottle. This anchor beer bottle opener has got an elegant design plus it’s quite easy to use.
The Yoption Anchor beer bottle opener is also suitable to be given as a gift for wedding, birthdays, anniversary, etc. It could also suffice as a promotional gift for your loyal customers.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The Magcap beer bottle opener has got a unique stocking stuffer. The magnetic bottle opener is fortified with 2 neodymium magnets which enable it to grasp the bottle caps out of the air.
The Magcap bottle opener grabs your beer bottle cap as soon as you bring your bottle close to it. The Magcap bottle opener has hidden magnets which traps bottle caps.
You can choose to shock your guests and friends as their bottle caps get wedged by the Magcap bottle opener.
The magnet bottle opener can’t get rusty because of its coating. Thus, it’s suitable for both exterior and interior use. Just simply hang the Magcap to your bar or kitchen’s wall. Its beautiful tangled nickel surface matches any location.
The Magcap has a sturdy texture as it’s made from a solid zinc alloy component which has a long lifespan.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
No doubt, there are a ton of these beer bottle openers available in the market today. However, you’ve to be cautious not to buy something that may not last enough time.
By now, you should’ve gotten comprehensive information about the top beer bottle openers. Thus, we trust you can make the right choice.
M
ostly linked to the military, bomber jackets for men began to make their first appearance during World War I. It was originally the Fall of 1917 when the United States Army launched an Aviation clothing organization that made this bomber jackets. They were often worn by pilots to keep them warm in the skies. In this time, not all planes had enclosed cockpits like we have today.
The Aviation clothing organization made leather, heavy-duty jackets with a zipper finish that also came complete with shoulder flaps. This would end up entrapping the neck, waist, and wrap perfectly around the neck with snug cuffs to keep the pilots warm.
By World War II, British designer Leslie Irvin made a sheepskin flying jacket design that is often used today. The production of this jacket became prominent in the British Royal Air Force throughout World War II in the 1920s. The demand was massive for these jackets, so Irvin opened up his own clothing manufacturing business that subcontracted for several places.
By 1980s, they gained new life when high schools, as well as pro-baseball teams, began to use them. This made them well-known in popular culture and a staple in American as well as world fashion.
These once military jackets have managed to stand out in popular fashion. Bomber jackets for men are now some of the most well-known clothing items in the world. Due to that popularity, they’re all over the place. That can make it difficult to find the right type of bomber jacket for you. Whether it’s due to price, make, or style.
We wanted to help, so we put together a great list of 8 bomber jackets for men that you’ll absolutely love. Before we get to those, however, we have some FAQs we need to address first.
There are a ton of reasons why you should be rocking bomber jackets for men these days. One of the most obvious reasons to wear one is the warmth they provide. Keep in mind, if they’re good enough for our boys and girls in the military while in the sky, we think it’ll work for you too.
They keep you warm by trapping in body heat and using it to keep you warm. Due to their style, wind cannot break through and no cold air can enter the tightened areas at the bottom of the jacket or the wrist area cuffs. They’re incredibly durable as well, as they needed to be for members of the Air Force during World War I and World War II.
Most bomber jackets for men are made out of nylon and polyester material, with some made by cotton. This means most external material can successfully keep water out of the interior. This allows most bomber jackets to be water resistant, as rain and the like bounces or flows off rather than seeps through.
Most of the material tends to be able to absorb 30% of water without getting damp in any way.
These jackets are also incredibly comfortable to wear. They may seem heavy, but most tend to be relatively light even with the water absorption. Their style continues to be long-lasting, and most of the time they make you look tremendous with a cool look every time.
For you to know if the bomber jackets actually keep you warm, we have to take you to where it all started from so that you understand the whole idea behind this bomber jackets. As we have said earlier, the bomber jacket was originally made for the military.
Just when they thought they had something they could call theirs for a long time, things took a turn and the clothing started to trickle down into subcultures until it made its way to high fashion. This is the reason why it has become so rampant nowadays.
The bomber jackets were designed to be light, comfortable and most importantly keep the air pilots warm.
The structure of the bomber jacket had a fur-like collar. This collar was made out of cotton but after some years the material used for the collar was changed to nylon because it was perceived that nylon was much more suitable since it had the ability to keep perspiration out and it was water-resistant as well.
As the years passed by, these jackets began to appear in Europe. Due to this occurrence, the European Air Forces admired it and decided to popularize it. In the long run, the European Air Forces became the commercial consumer of the product.
Considering the process by which this jacket has transited from the military to Special Forces and then subcultures, one would think that the bomber jacket was going to face some kind of alterations but that was not the case. Instead, the bomber jacket has maintained its masculine and athletic silhouette alongside its fitted waist and a large fit.
Not forgetting the sleeves are quite bulky with extra pockets around the jacket to boost the functionality.
With all said, the idea behind the bomber jackets isn’t about being stylish alone but to be primarily warm. Hence, you have no reason to go out of style in winter.
As time goes by, a lot of evolution takes place and this doesn’t exclude the bomber jackets. When the bomber jackets were a thing in the military, it was made with heavy leather since leather was a strong and heavy material. This happened because of breakneck speeds and high altitudes in airplanes that were not so advanced.
Another reason for this was to keep the soldiers warm.
After this, another version of the bomber jacket was released by the US Army Air Corps. These versions were made with cinched cuffs, cinched waists, wraparound collars, and zipper closures. All these features were under the protection of fur linings and wind flaps.
From the description, you can tell that these jackets were very durable. It was after these versions that various variations kept popping out from all over. From cotton outers, leather straps, knitted collars, fur collars to an orange lining.
The reason for the orange lining was to enhance visibility if an accident occurs. This gave birth to more different exceptional styles each season to meet the needs of customers.
Hence, designers play around with different materials like wool, satin, neoprene, leather, gauze, and leather. They are even creative to also add some other elements like lace-ups, ruffles, and embroidered patchwork. This is what makes the bomber jacket an important fashion jacket that you should have in your closet.
If you like to look stylish, dapper and blazing hot (Obviously during the fall), the Nantersan Mens casual outdoor jacket is the right choice for you. Yes! Wearing this bomber jacket puts you in a unique league far above your peers because of its premium design and quality.
From the above picture, you can see that the interior has a check-like design that gives you that chance to flaunt when you are in the midst of the opposite sex.
Obviously, every lady desires to have a bloke that has got style even with his good looks and great manner of approach. The first thing any lady notices when she sees you will be your Nantersan Mens casual outdoor bomber jacket before she smells your cologne or hears you speak.
Thus, if you’re not looking “fly” she may quickly visit the ladies before you walk up to her.
So, don’t trade your style for anything in this world, because it sure matters to the next lady at the corner. Let’s just say it’s a subtle investment to buy this stylish American men’s bomber jacket.
Also, you should note that getting this bomber jacket isn’t going to be because of its style alone, it has amazing features that match its elegance, side by side.
100 percent of its fabric is made from polyester and the lining of the jacket from 100 polyester materials. The weight of the bomber jacket is quite light; hence, it feels absolutely comfortable to wear. It also has a zipper closure that’s swift without any frictions.
The Nantersan Mens casual outdoor jacket is one windbreaker jacket that you can rock all through the spring/ fall Season.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The fitting of the Goodthreads men bomber jacket is superb. It looks so much like what you see the middleweight professional boxer, Floyd Mayweather wears when he goes for his press conferences before a major fight like the one he had against Manny Pacquiao from the Philippines.
Like the saying, “A good name is worth twice much more than money,” so is the case of the Goodthreads men’s bomber jacket.
They’ve earned a good name to deliver quality bomber jackets over the years. No doubt, their name “Goodthreads” says it all. Even though they recently kicked off in 2009 with children’s wears, we can say the clothing line has grown to produce solid outfits that have clothed many; great and small.
Probably it’s because the clothing line started with children’s wears, – which is a good foundation for a start. That’s why they’ve been able to deliver solid bomber jackets for men today. If you an athlete representing your country on the field or track, or even representing your brand like Mayweather, you obviously pay attention to your image.
Wearing the Goodthreads bomber jacket will definitely add to that brand uplift you’ve always desired.
The Goodthreads men bomber jacket is a great combination of “beauty and function” more like “beauty and brains.” That’s why it has an authentic 100% percent polyester material that is water resistant and easy to maintain, plus its machine washable.
Also, the weight of the bomber jacket is quite light, making it comfortable for you to rock anytime. The black bomber jacket has a satin-like finishing with contrast ribbing at the cuffs, hem, and collar giving the bomber jacket an awesome look.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The first glance at this jacket from its top to down without seeing the head figure of the person wearing it, you may or may not conclude its Drake, the Canadian- American hip hop rapper, modeling for Logeeyar Men’s Bomber jacket.
Yeah Right!
That was close. I almost got you there. Anyways, it’s not Drake rocking it, but your brain telling you so. It’s not a surprise anyway, as a minimum of 7 people out of 10 would have thought concluded the same as you did. So don’t be bothered, you’re not the only one getting the vibes.
This is what happens when a company invests in quality planning and strategy before they make any product for their consumers. The Logeeyar Men’s Bomber jacket gives you the look and feel of a music celebrity, just like Drake as we’ve mentioned earlier. Oh yes! You can say that again! No jokes.
Do you know that top-notch fashion brands actually invest in a lot of research and psychological observations before they release any outfit? They make wears that tally together with our way of thinking and the way we live our lives. That’s why we experience fashion trends over and over again every season.
It’s obvious that the manufacturers of this bomber jacket paid attention to details on its body design, apart from its attractive looks. Thus, they built the jacket to have a lightweight from a 60 percent Cotton and 40 percent polyester material which gives you that comfort and durability.
Compared to other bomber jackets, the Logeeyar Men’s Bomber jacket is an all-season jacket which can be rocked from winter to summer with its well-designed ribbed hem, cuff, and collar. This also the jacket is available in all sizes from small to extra-large.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
If you loved the way Arnold Schwarzenegger looked in “the Terminator,” you will definitely want to rock this anytime. This military looking bomber jacket gives you that unique “bad guy” look especially if you blend it with a set of black denim pants.
You’d be sure to get a huge admirable stare from everyone in your neighborhood. The bomber jacket has a way of magnifying your machismo, by giving that buffed up “Arnold Schwarzenegger” looks even if you’re not so built.
This classic military built bomber jacket also has an attractive orange lining that keeps begging to be flaunted and also doubles as a poly fiber fill that gives you enough warmth in the cold. This MA-1 flight bomber jacket comes with a Zipper Utility Pocket on the left Sleeve with 4 anterior slash pockets to store your belongings.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
When it comes to bomber jackets, you can be sure that the Alpha industries won’t disappoint you regardless of the gender type. The reason for this is because they have been in the business of making these jackets for military personnel, thus, they have grown into a familiar choice in different parts of the world.
They also make it a point of duty to make their products stylish, comfortable and practical. Hence, you can be sure that the MA-1 bomber jacket is nothing short of this. From the design, you’d observe that this jacket is sleek, clean and classic. The fun part; you can decide to go business casual with it or just casual.
Whatever you choose to do, this 100% nylon bomber 1.5 lbs jacket, you’d still be on track.
The MA-1 bomber jacket is not just made of nylon but smooth and durable nylon. This material is water-resistant thus; you don’t have to worry if the rain catches up with you unplanned because it will make up for your inability to forecast the weather. If it’s a sunny day, you can still rock your jacket anyways.
When it comes to the cold weather, this jacket can protect you but it also depends on what you pair it up with underneath.
Other features that make this bomber jacket stand out in its own way include the two pockets located in the interior, the utility pockets on the left sleeve, and two lower button closable pockets. The interior of the jacket is orange and the reason has been stated earlier.
Also, the MA-1 bomber is fully reversible with its “remove before flight” tag on the sleeve.
If you want to order this jacket and you’re not sure which one would fit your body measurement, it’s safer to go for a normal size if you require a slim fit and opt for one size up from your body measurement if you require a relaxed fit.
The MA-1 isn’t just durable, but it’s for anyone. Hence, if you want to get a timeless piece that you can be creative with, the MA-1 bomber jacket is a perfect choice.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The Chouyatou Lightweight Bomber Jacket is a good jacket that’s made of 100% cotton and weighs up to 1lb. This machine-wash stylish jacket can go with a more casual look. It has a smooth feel and it can be worn during the spring or fall. It can also pass for winter as long as the vest underneath the jacket is thick.
This bomber jacket is durable despite the fact that it isn’t water resistant.
This jacket was specially designed with extra pockets for your convenience. It has a breast pocket on the upper right and a pocket with a short zipper on the left with two pockets on both sides of the jacket. This jacket has a lining in the interior that is made of 100% polyester to keep you warm.
The Chouyatou bomber jacket has inner pockets asides the front multi-pockets and a full front-zip placket to ensure that you’re either locked in or fully out with the zipper on the left. The stand collar of this jacket is quite impressive with its knitted hem and rib cuff.
If you’re looking for an attractive bomber jacket for spring and fall seasons; this jacket is the best fit. It also comes in different colors like green, army, black and khaki.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
It certainly not “bread and butter,” considering all the brain work and training involved. Now, if you’re one of those people that want to command the respect of a cop because you look like one, this is an option.
Wearing one of this Urban Classic bomber jackets will definitely keep you at the top of your game if you like the “cop cut shortcut.” When you wear this bomber jacket you also stand the chance of looking like a movie star that receives the stares of everyone.
The truth is wearing this bomber jacket helps boosts your self-esteem and leaves you speaking without uttering a word.
It’s no surprise though because it’s not called an urban classic for nothing. With its simple design, you can decide to dress down or dress up. The jacket has a lining in the interior that’s made of 100% polyester to keep your game tight regardless of the weather.
Another cool thing is this jacket has a way of making the weather have nothing on you.
This simply means that if you’re out doing your thing and by any chance, the sky decides to do the payback game for trying to steal all the attention the entire day by raining on you, the jacket will help you pull through because it’s water-repellent.
All you need to do is use the full zip at the front of the jacket that is made from light polyester fabric and you’d do just fine.
This bomber jacket also has pockets to help you store up some personal items that may come in handy when you’re in transit. The jacket has two side pockets located at the uni-colored long sleeve and a distinctive bomber pocket at the left arm.
If you’re wondering what seasons are perfect for this jacket, autumn, summer, and spring is the answer. It’s also important to note that this jacket is not water-proof in case you’re limiting your search to water-proof jackets only.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
This fantastic bomber jacket will make you more explosive than you can ever imagine. When you want to make a choice of bomber jackets, it’s necessary for you to have flexibility on your mind.
This enables you to play around with different combinations. The Springrain bomber jacket is made from polyester and leather and it weighs 0.95 lbs. The leather that used to make this jacket gives it a classic look which is perfect for a casual jacket.
Do you like biking, racing, driving, running or even motorcycling, party, golfing, school, work or anything at all? Then this jacket would give you the best touch to these activities. This bomber jacket helps reflect everything that it stands for.
If you have eyes for details, then this jacket will interest you because it has one concealed pocket inside which makes the design unique for you to admire, a stand collar that feels pretty good on the neck and a long sleeve with leather to protect you from any kind of weather.
The mix of faux leather in this jacket doesn’t just look classic but it makes you warm at the same time.
The front part of the jacket has a metal zipper closure that is durable thus you won’t be worrying about getting a replacement when you buy these. The Springrain bomber jacket has two zip pockets in front which can store anything portable.
Another feature that contributes immensely to making you feel warm and comfortable wearing this jacket is the lining that’s found in the interior of the jacket.
No doubt, when you wear the jacket the inner lining is invisible to anyone else but you; nevertheless, the jacket was still crafted beautifully to the inner lining which isn’t visible to anyone but you. The lining is made of polyester. This material helps to make you feel warm.
As regards cleaning this jacket, you can machine wash it without being scared of it getting damaged. It’s also advisable to avoid bleach on this bomber jacket as much as possible.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
Owning a bomber jacket should be a must have for any man who has a good taste for fashion especially during the spring and autumn. Thus, we have listed this top 8 bomber jackets to make the shopping process easy for you. However, making a perfect choice is largely relative, depending on what you are looking for.
W
ith each fall and winter season, a new climate arises that presents an opportunity. One that allows men to step out of the summer body need and look into the winter bod. It’s less maintenance but only on the body, not the wallet. This is where the amazing peacoats for men come into play. They look good, keep you warm, and help you stand out.
You want something that can make you look good yet also not kill you in the finance category. We get it, trust us. That is why we’re leading you into the peacoats for men category. They look amazing but they won’t cost you as much as the random suit jacket might cost.
Peacoats are the perfect apparel for the fall and winter seasons. They’re mostly thick wool jackets worn in the cold to give your body the desired warmth needed. The first existence of the peacoats dates back to the 1600s where the Camplin family produced and supplied it to the British Royal Navy.
While originally worn by the British, the United States Navy eventually rocked the peacoat too. It kept the sailors warm when they sailed the open sea during cold nights. By the 1800s, the peacoat became prominent and eventually referred to as an “officer’s coat” or “reefer jacket.”
The British Naval petty officers along with United States pilots for the newer Air Force wore it as their uniform during World War II. After the war was over, many took their peacoat home with them and it became a long-term style. Today, they are classic fashion statements. However, it can be hard to find good deals on them when trying to shop for one.
That said, we wanted to help. First, let’s get to some FAQs about peacoats.
Every single person’s style varies because it’s a way of expressing your personality. For instance, the fashion style of a tech geek might be different from that of a celebrity in the entertainment world. For some, the style regardless of pain or function is useless so long as they look good.
Meanwhile, others feel comfort is the most important thing.
When it comes to styles that peacoats for men can offer, you came to the right place. You can pair one with a Breton jumper. This typically comes with the traditional white and blue stripes like a French seaman’s sweater. It then balances well with a dark blue/black jeans. Meanwhile, black chinos pants and a peacoat go very well together.
Pin rolled jeans and wool trousers are great with peacoats and blend naturally. There are also several fabrics for corporate looks like corduroy. This allows you to wear peacoats for men in the boardroom and a night out with the guys..
You can have a more classic look by adding a winter gray coarse neck roll. However, you can have a more iconic Serge Gainsbourg or James Dean look by getting a navy blue neck roll instead of the gray color.
While Navy blue is the most common peacoat color, Gray and Black options are great too. Meanwhile, the military vibe comes into play with Khaki green peacoats. Colors like Burgundy or a Rustic color can also be great for any look.
Footwear is simplistic too with a brogue or minimalist sneaker working well with this look.
Every peacoat in the past was created to have a specific function it carries out.
When you take a look at the “shorter cut” of the peacoat, for example, you may not realize its original design concept. These were made to allow easier movement. Overall, double-breasted peacoats help to make your entire body warmer when you wear it.
The high collar and wide lapels function to ensure the cold air cannot get in your coat. Therefore, keeping you warmer at all times.
The lapels and collar are often held together with buttons, which are the main reason they stay in place. This is perfect during insanely windy conditions or action when you’re moving about quickly.
Peacoats for men are also typically made with thick wool, allowing it to be very durable. Often, peacoats are flame retardant as well. While not all fall under this category, a fair amount tend to be. Those that can allow you to extinguish a fire or flame without any assistance.
This offers ultimate protection.
This could allow you to run through fire without any real downside to the coat. Well, as long as you don’t just stand in one. It is only the jacket you don’t worry about, not the rest of your body.
Overall, however, peacoats for men were mainly designed for warm. The wool alone proves this fact as well as its use among military members for several centuries. We could not recommend them enough for times you need good, warm clothing.
Will it keep you warm?
Men, that is what it was literally made for.
It’s obvious that different materials are used to make peacoats. Keep in mind, they differ in price for a reason. However, before a peacoat is made with any kind of material, two things are put into consideration. That’s warmth and the cost of the coat.
Interestingly, the most expensive peacoats available are made out of goat wool instead of sheep’s wool. Peacoats for men made out of goat wool is designed to be more luxurious. This is likely why there is such a high price difference. While affording one is half the battle, you also have to clean them and maintain their luxurious nature.
This can be an expense on its own.
Meanwhile Sheep’s wool or Melton wool is less expensive and more commonly worn. They are often reasonably priced and much easier to find. A good portion of those on our guide will come under this category.
Before purchasing any peacoat, however, you want to keep your budget in mind. Watch out for the percentage of wool that a peacoat has. Peacoats for men with 100% wool surely give you outstanding warm, but they will be more expensive than a blended version.
We recommend you go blended when you’re on a tighter budget, as the materials are often perfect. You’ll often see a combination of acrylic, nylon, and other manufactured materials here. While the feel of a blended coat will differ from one made of 100% wool, this won’t really affect the overall style or affect that blended versions will bring.
Plus, at a lower price, it is a sensible purchase to go blended over 100% wool sometimes.
We feel the Match Mens peacoat might be one of the very best peacoats for men on the market today. It’s a blended model with 70% wool and 30% polyester, making it a great budget choice. This is perfect material for warmth in the bitter cold. The weight is pretty easy to deal with too, as it’s only 1.3lbs.
While these peacoats for men may look expensive, but it’s truly not. However, we should alert you that Match Men’s claims it needs to be dry clean only. This means it’s not an easy laundry choice. Despite this, it goes well with most anything from jeans to dress pants and everything in-between.
We should also point out that the buttons on this peacoat model aren’t as strong as they might need to be. The reason is understandable, as the buttons on one side have a loose fit that enables you to wear the coat with ease. If this becomes a problem, Match Mens managed to fix the issue before it started with an ability to secure the buttons.
The buttons can be secured but if you find it harder than it needs to be, you can use the smaller buttons positioned right behind them. This tends to work pretty well.
When you flip the collar, it sadly does not have a higher button to support the flap. This means it can be colder in the winter during those windy times of the month. This can be avoided with a simple scarf addition.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The Nautica Men’s double-breasted peacoat is another fine option for the fall and winter seasons. This is another blended model with the outer portion made up of 52% wool, 7% Rayan, 6% Nylon, 30% polyester, and 5% other fibers. Meanwhile, it weighs in at a mere 1.4lbs.
The over 50% wool ensures proper warmth, but with the inner side made of 100% polyester, that warmth is sealed in.
These peacoats for men have a double-breasted design in front, helping you wrap up and remain warm. This comes with additional vertical side pockets to keep your hands warm, which are properly lined and reasonably deep. Due to the depth, you can put a number of personal items in the pockets like a cell phone, car keys, and even a hat.
The notched lapels and collars are properly fitted with the collar being able to flip up to help keep the wicked wind away.
The arm length in these peacoats for men need to be kept in mind when you buy. They can be a little longer than some others out there. This is both good and bad, in that the added arm length gives more warmth but stylistically it could go beyond your hands.
This means you need to keep sizing in mind before you buy. Overall, this Nautica model is perfect with all the bells and whistles, including anchor buttons and polyfill.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
This well-designed DKNY 32-inch peacoat is a fantastic option that can be worn with nearly anything, including dress clothing. It tends to weigh 1lb, and at a first glance seems like it could be an expensive coat. Bigger men, especially athletic types will find these peacoats for men work perfectly.
Despite being a bit thinner than others on the list, it keeps you incredibly warm. The peacoat’s 4×4 double breast can help add to the warmth. Meanwhile, the notch lapel sits properly on the collar for a fashionable look. The collar can be flipped to help block wind, and a button is present to keep that in place.
These peacoats for men go a little past your hip, which is great for style and warmth in the cold months.
The buttons for the coat are fitted to enable easy closure while the vertical pockets on the sides can be used to store personal items. Due to the depth, you can keep your hands incredibly warm and likely ensure theft protection a bit too. Meanwhile, the vent with the peacoat helps to improve movement in it.
The sleeves cover your arms efficiently to properly protect you from the cold. When it comes to cleaning these peacoats for men, you’ll need to dry clean it only.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The Tom’s Ware peacoat is tremendous and a blended option with 65% Rayon and 35% wool. It’s both soft and warm, capable of being worn in the cold winter and the lesser cold periods of the fall. It’s clearly quite stylish but this is assisted by its modern cut fit and amazing quality material used.
The warmth of these peacoats for men ultimately comes from the wool infused in the fabric. This is in spite of lightweight design with 1.2lbs in overall weight. This lower weight allows you to use the peacoat in a business casual or simple casual setting, allowing it to be perfect for the office as well as drinks with the guys on a Friday night.
The fitted buttons allow for easy closure while the style is helped out by the belted back, cuffs, and vertical pockets. Winds won’t be an issue to deal with as the arm length works to perfectly keep this away.
One note to keep in mind is that it is recommended to dry clean these jackets only, as it can be quite important. You may also want to pay attention to the sizing before you purchase as well.
The United States and European sizes can differ, which is key to remember. Large to XXXL is 42-50 for Americans but 52-60 for Europeans. You’ll want to keep this in mind when buying any clothing item.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The Premium Wool Blend Peacoat is one of the highest quality coats on the list, coming in at a normal weight of about 1.9 Pounds. The pockets are seemingly abundant with these peacoats for men as they have two pockets in the lower flaps on the outer side.
Meanwhile, the two interior pockets are both deep and very efficient. They can be used to hold personal valuables like car keys, a cell phone, and more.
These peacoats have a slim fit, meaning they may not be right for everyone. Sometimes only certain heights and body types can pull off peacoats for men like this. However, the overall peacoat is tremendous with things like a back vent to help make walking and running a bit easier. It’s also useful for both casual and business attire.
Of course, since this is a blended peacoat it will have more than just wool in it. These particular peacoats for men are 51.8% wool, 41.4% polyester, 3.2% acrylic, 2.2% viscose, and 1.3% cotton. The materials combine to make a warm and comfortable fit with 100% lining and filling to ensure this.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The Chouyatou Double-Breasted peacoat is a classic peacoat that takes a step back to the past. These peacoats for men are made in China, like seemingly everything. They are one of the best out there, as it was named one of the best men’s winter peacoats for 2018.
Looking at this peacoat, we can see why as it offers a corporate casual swagger that can work for any businessman in a white-collar job. Meanwhile, it does not come at a corporate price and can work for the average guy in the average job.
Of course, as it is stated in the coat’s name it is double-breasted for style and usage. However, it also has a button fly closure to add to both. This is a blended model, so we know it’s not 100% wool. In fact, it’s 10% polyester, 30% viscose, and 60% wool. However, it has a 100% polyester lining to give this a comfortable yet warm and sturdy finish.
These peacoats for men have three buttons on the sleeves to offer a classic look as well as a turndown lapel collar to offer a premium look. The beautiful slant pockets on both sides of the jacket are perfect for holding most personal items.
Due to being a Chinese product, Americans & Europeans want to be sure to order about 3 sizes larger than your normal.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The Aptro Slim Fit Wool Winter Peacoat is made up of 80% wool and 20% polyester, making it one of the most wool using blended options on the market. These peacoats for men are perfect for both corporate and casual wear with premium quality backing it up.
This even adds to its warmth level as much as its overall style.
This peacoat is also blended with a French façade to only give is a more cozy feel, while it’s also a slim fit to only add to its style. The padding is tremendous and useful in keeping you warm as it utilizes the wool fabric perfectly. Due to using so much wool, it may not seem like it from the appearance but this is a very lightweight peacoat.
The shape of these peacoats for men does not alter regardless of what you put it through. It does not fade or shrink, but only when dry cleaned. Although it may do both if used with a regular washing machine unit. However, it can keep itself relatively clean due to the wool offering as well, so it does not need to be washed on a regular basis.
This allows it to last much longer.
The peacoat also has two side pockets to comfortably accommodate your hands for cold times. These pockets are also incredibly useful for various personal items, and due to the deep nature, you’re unlikely to lose the items as well.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The Papijam Long Peacoat is a perfect khaki coat that is well-known for its warmness in the cold, as well as its sleek and soft finish. This is a blended peacoat that’s made up of 63% wool, 28% polyester, 6% rayon, and 3% other fibers. This combines to make one heck of a great peacoat.
The three button closure makes it easy to put on or take off. This combines with 2 inner pockets that can safely store personal items like car keys, credit cards, and other vital accessories. The pockets are lined with fleece to offer a warm place to put your hands when its cold out.
These peacoats for men are perfect for any place or event you decide to go to, as they’re perfect for corporate or casual periods. It offers a nice elegance without going over the top, along with being unique looking enough to make you catch some looks in a good way.
These peacoats for men may be an interesting khaki color, but other color options have been presented at times. Keep in mind as well that this is a Chinese product, and you’ll likely need to order 3 sizes up from your normal size.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The Tommy Hilfiger Men’s Brady Double-Breasted Peacoat certain lives up to its brand name and reputation. These peacoats for men are another blended option with 60% wool, 25% polyester, and 15% other fibers. It’s a bit heavier than it might appear, which is something to keep in mind.
This is a noose peacoat look to most, which can be assumed by the two rows of buttons on this double-breasted model. However, the buttons do seem somewhat loose so you may want to reinforce them before too long.
These peacoats for men have a good amount of room for you to wear a sweatshirt among other things underneath. This item has long sleeves that go far enough to fully cover your arms in the cold and tend to go as far as the mid-palm. This may make it appear a bit larger but it helps a great deal.
Due to the size of these peacoats for men, the wind is practically nothing to this thing. The size is something to keep in mind, however, so if you do not like heavier coats then this could be a turn-off.
The lower part of the peacoat will stretch a few inches lower than your belt line. However, the hem is tapered so the overall appearance won’t look bad regardless of how long it goes.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The Tom Ware’s Wool Blend Peacoat differs from the previous Tom Ware model. This mostly comes with its single closure button on the outside, while the other buttons are tacked on inside. This allows it to double as both casual and corporate in appearance, which overall helps this item stand out to us.
Like most, this is a blended model made up of 65% rayon and 35% wool while it has a 100% polyester lining. This offers both stylish and warm peacoats for men in this case.
This is also a lightweight model, making it comfortable to wear in most seasons. Tom Ware’s peacoat is said to be dry clean only, meaning it should not be part of your machine washing clothing.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
It doesn’t have to be a hassle to select perfect peacoats for men on the market. You just have to pay more attention to the features of the peacoat. That means paying close attention to things like the body fit, style, dimension, comfortability, and material quality.
However, you also want to pay attention to the reputation of the brand, construction quality, color, price, and warmth provided. Of course, gathering all this information or trying to pay close attention to it can be stressful.
This is why we tried to help out the best we could. We feel we did that by offering an article that will perfectly help you find the best peacoats for men on the market today. That said, we hope you found one you wanted. Come back again for another great Men’s Gear buyer’s guide where we’ll go over yet another item that you should keep your eyes on.
An advanced tactical shirt protects you when you’re out there in the open doing all those manly outdoor things. Tactical shirts are one of the best ways to survive in the great outdoors. They’re sure to keep you comfortable regardless of the rough treatment and are designed to securely hold onto everything you stuff it with, for whatever purpose. The right tactical shirt will very quickly become your go-to clothing choice, whatever the occasion.
5.11, Under-Armous, Tru-Spec and Rothco are among the biggest tactical wear manufacturers and make high-quality, versatile products that last literally forever. These tactical shirts can be easily worn above body armour and leveraged excellently for all kinds of safety or adrenaline-rushing activities. Most importantly, they are perfect for concealing your carry-on weapons.
However, there are few things you must consider before you decide to buy a tactical shirt.
Tactical shirts can help you maintain peak performance while hunting, hiking and fishing, training or even while executing a high-stakes mission. They’re also super useful even if you’re just heading out for another hard day at work. They accomplish this with the help of a few significant features. Features such as rip-stop fabrics, easy-access pockets that are also expandable, concealed pockets, button-down collar stays, reinforced elbows to protect your skin at the most common contact points, button cuffs and roll-up loops, special plackets that give you fast, secure access to your firearm etc. are exclusive to tactical shirts. These features are also exactly what sets them apart from normal shirts.
Remarkably, tactical shirts that are more suited for outdoors come with certain extra features and slightly different characteristics such as, heat capes or mesh vents to help keep you cool, soft and stretchable fabrics to ensure maximum mobility, expandable pockets, tactical camouflage and double-fabric elbows and other stress-point reinforcements. All these features immensely boost the functionality of tactical shirts and our usually a no-brainer especially if you do a lot of hazardous outdoor work.
Today, you have limitless choices in buying tactical clothing with numerous brands coming out with new styles and tactical clothing lines literally every new day. So how do you, the ideal yet frugal consumer know what to look for and maximize the value for money proposition of your purchase? The first question obviously is to ask what your needs are? Are you a law enforcement, military or security officer? Are you an outdoor sports enthusiast, an instructor, or simply a shooter sports enthusiast? Once you understand what your needs are, then you can begin the certainly tiring search for the right piece of clothing. There’s a plethora of options. Why would you choose a certain brand over another? Are you looking for durability? Or maybe the price is a determining factor.
Here are the most certain factors you need to take into account before selecting a tactical shirt.
Always look for clothing made from high tech synthetic fabrics rather than traditional cotton canvas. It wicks moisture better and can definitely keep you comfortable in a wider range of climates then heavier weight cotton canvas. Remember, synthetic fibres transition better from climate to climate, don’t fade quickly and are a breeze to launder especially while travelling. They’re obviously the superior choice.
If the fit isn’t right, move on to another brand or style that makes clothes that fit you better. Whilst remaining roomy, tactical clothing needs to fit just right. They need to be roomy but not over-the-top baggy.
Pockets are a necessity, whether it’s to carry your car keys, your pocket knife, your spare magazines, or even to just tuck your hands in. Pockets are useless when they cannot fit common items or are lined with material that simply won’t support the items they are intended for. A practical design for the pockets on the shirts is a simple necessity. You might not need too many, but you do want them to hold what they’re intended to hold. Furthermore, they need to be the right places, because accessibility is everything.
It wasn’t too long ago when tactical clothing only came in military colours, limiting your choices to one variation or another of OD green, khaki and camouflage. Today tactical clothing has become a lot more mainstream for law enforcement and military officers, a subtle hint to this is the addition of black and navy blue.
While wearing a version of tactical clothing, you’d prefer to blend seamlessly into your surroundings, whether for job requirements, safety, or just the desire to not stand out. Let’s face it, tactically dressed people are quite a sore sight to look at.
This fad has paved the way of more eccentric colours such as different variations of brown, green, blue and red among others. This has enabled the tactical dresser to indulge in recreational activities after work without appearing too ballsy or intimidating.
The look of tactical shirts fall in sync with all of its other features. This is a purely subjective preference. However, if you’d like something like say, less tactical, but just as functional, shop keeping that in mind. There are plenty of options out there. Even quite a few in our list. Many have moved away from the time-honoured, shapeless look of mainstream tactical clothing and become increasingly inclined towards the less tactical but more practical clothing. There are a lot of brands that allow you to go for a movie right after a terrifying and demanding hike in the high mountains without breaking a sweat. Look out for them and you’ll be glad you did.
Let us now have a look at the best tactical shirts you can buy today.
The basic 5.11 tactical shirt is the comfortable, durable and functional choice. It is often the go to clothing option for law enforcement, military and fire professionals. It’s versatile enough to be worn both on and off-duty. 5.11 Tactical Shirts are assured with 5.11’s exceptional fit, their patented hidden document pockets and a cutting-edge heat management system.
The Tactical Shirts have hidden button-down collar stays and a handsome, functional design that also effortlessly gives off a professional appearance. You can easily stash your cell phone or any document in 5.11’s patented hidden document pockets located within the front chest of the 5.11 Tactical Shirts. They are designed to be discreet complete with one-handed access and a Velcro enclosure. The left pocket incorporates a dual pass-through slot for pens, chem-lights and tire gauges. Two narrow pen pockets are also placed on the left sleeve.
5.11 Tactical Shirts are made of tough, 5.4-oz. cotton canvas. They’re manufactured using technologies such as triple needle construction and consist of 26 bar tacks in high-stress areas and reinforced anti-crack, anti-chip melamine buttons. This results in an amazingly hard-wearing shirt. A large cape-back with a tacked centre point covers the moisture-sucking Drilex material to efficiently vent and evaporate moisture around the clock. Stitched eyelets at each gusseted underarm further dispel heat and moisture to keep you cool.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
ColdGear Infrared uses a soft, thermo-conductive inner coating that causes to absorb and retain your own body heat. The dual-layer fabric gives you a soft, warm interior and a smooth, fast-drying exterior. The 4-way stretch fabrication also allows greater mobility whilst retaining its shape. The moisture transport system makes sure that no sweat stays on your body and the quick-dry fabric used keeps you light and comfortable. Additional anti-odour technology prevents the growth of odour causing microbes and this is further bolstered by the smooth, chafe-free flat lock seam construction.
This mock can keep you reasonably warm as a standalone piece of clothing. It also offers excellent protection from the elements and is an excellent piece of kit for those who do tough outdoor work. It can be used as an excellent base layer under your jacket, shirt or sweater if it gets too cold. It’s made from 87% Polyester and 13% Elastane.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The Tru-Spec Men’s Winter Combat Shirt has a special grid fleeced body for increased breathability and improved sweat absorption. The sleeves are lined with grid fleece and feature an adjustable hook and a loop cuff. It also has a pencil stall. The shirt body is made with performance plus grid fleece.
It features tactical response uniform sleeves with a 1/4 zip front mandarin collar. The zip is very cleverly hidden under a hood for added comfort. The elbows are reinforced for extra comfort and the zipper also has a cover hood for added durability. There are shoulder pockets and also internal hidden pockets to further increase functionality. The shirt is versatile enough to be used in both professional and casual environments. It’s made of 93% polyester and 7% spandex.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The Propper F5302 Long Sleeve Tactical Shirt is a comfortable and durable solid option regardless of your prospective uses. The lightweight Battle Rip fabric is fade, shrink and wrinkle resistant. The two box-pleated chest pockets with button-through flaps allow you to store and organize smaller items and gear that you may want to carry around with you at all times, including compact weapons.
Furthermore, the fused pocket flaps, internal collar stays and epaulets provide a clean, professional look, even after repeated washes. It also features an optional badge tab that can be used to insert identity badges for professional environments. It’s made from a blend of polyester and cotton.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
This shirt is specifically designed to be worn under body armour. Water-resistant rip-stop fabric strategically placed on top of the sleeves do an excellent job of protecting you from the elements. They also put up with the wear & tear of body armour. It’s tough, lightweight and durable.
Furthermore, the 4-way stretch construction moves better in all directions. The material absorbs sweat and dries through really fast. It has multi-zippered sleeve pockets and the left sleeve also features a 4×4 patch. It’s made from 100% other fibres.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
Under Armour ensures a solid next-to-skin comfort with this compression shirt made of ultra-soft fabric. Then it should be no surprise that this ultra-tight compression shirt fits just like a second skin. The lightweight, 4-way stretch fabrication improves range of motion, absorbs sweat very quickly and dries super-fast. The advanced moisture transport system keeps you cool, dry, and super comfortable effortlessly.
The Anti-odour technology prevents the growth of odour-causing microbes. It is made of 100% polyester. However, be warned that the shirt will melt when exposed to extreme heat or open flames. This poses a risk of serious injury wherein the melted product can come into contact with your skin. Otherwise, this is the best undershirt by a very far margin.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
These shirts are fade, shrink and wrinkle-resistant. They feature an advanced, moisture-wicking fabric that dries up to 125% faster than cotton. They also feature hidden collar buttons. It has a two-channel pen pocket. It also has a gusseted breathable mesh underarm and a mic/sunglass clip on the shoulders.
The polo shirts are extended enough to be tucked into your pants. It features concealed collar stays and the sunglass holder is placed near the buttons. It’s made from a 6.8 oz. 94% polyester and 6% spandex interlock.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
This performance polo shirt by 5.11 is one that stays looking good day in and day out. It has a slight sheen and 5.11 has included all the features of their cotton Tactical Polo and then some more. These include the mic clips, the fully gusseted sleeves and even the pen pockets on the left sleeve.
The 5.11 Performance Polo shirt fabric is moisture wicking which prevents the growth of odour causing bacteria. No more shirts that stink of sweat. These Polo shirts are made with their proprietary SmartWeave fabric. This also helps the Performance Polo Shirt to resist snags and remain wrinkle-free.
You can easily attach your radio microphone to any of the three mic clips on the shoulders or the chest placket. The two pen pockets are located on the left sleeve. The strong synthetic fabric of the Performance Polo Shirt resists stains, tears and snags. The collars won’t be rolling at the edges, courtesy of the no roll collar which has flexible stays. The pen pockets are stitched to endure constant use and all seams are designed for both comfort and durability.
5.11 uses only melamine buttons on the Tactical Series Performance Polo Shirt. Melamine buttons don’t crack or break and can withstand the heat of an iron without melting. The stitching and materials used in the construction of the Performance Polo Shirt are of the highest quality demanded by Law Enforcement, Fire and Military personnel. It is made of 100% polyester.
5.11’s fully gusseted sleeves give you a complete range of motion even when wearing a ballistic vest. 5.11’s Performance Polo Shirt can easily outlast other polo shirts by a large margin and is exceptionally priced to give the best value that it just makes sense to wear the best.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
gest suppliers of tactical wear for the outdoors, military and survival gear. This experience is well-observed in how they’ve designed and manufactured the Rothco Tactical Performance Polo Shirt. It is a basic, no-nonsense tactical polo shirt and gets the job done, albeit quite well.
It has two mic clips on each shoulder and an additional one under the centre placket. It also houses two pen pockets on the left sleeve which are easily reachable. The moisture wicking properties of the material keep you dry and absorbs sweat at a very quick rate and dries up at an even faster rate. It is made from 100% polyester.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
This is another solid offering by Under Armour. The fabric is quick-drying, ultra-soft & has a more natural feel. The material wicks sweat & dries up really fast. This full-sleeve shirt is a part of their loose fit series and is best suited to be worn as a standalone piece of clothing. It is fuller cut for complete comfort and makes for an excellent base layer.
This shirt also offers excellent protection from the elements and is an excellent piece of kit for those who do tough outdoor work. It can be used as an excellent base layer under your jacket, shirt or sweater if it gets too cold. It’s made from 100% Polyester. It breathes extremely well and can be worn even in hot, humid weather despite the long sleeves. It is extremely versatile and does an exceptional job of keeping the wearer comfortable.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The original Long Sleeve 5.11 Tactical Shirt features a handsome, low-profile design. It is built from tough and breathable 5.4 oz. cotton canvas that’ll keep you functioning for longer than you’ll ever need to be.
The 5.11 Long Sleeve Tactical Shirt features a state of the art triple-stitched construction and 26 individual bar tack reinforcements for extreme durability in any environment. 5.11’s hidden document pockets provide a safe place to store those things which you’d like to hide from prying eyes. They also provide super quick access to concealed gear when and if the need ever arises.
The pen pockets at the left sleeve offer quick convenience alongside several other pockets on and inside the shirt. The patented integrated cape-back Drillex cooling system keeps you dry and comfortable all day long. They shirts absorb sweat and dry up incredibly fast that you’ll never feel sweaty or sticky due to your skin being wet.
5.11 has long been setting the standard for multi-purpose tactical apparel worldwide. They are extensively used by police, fire, and military professionals across a broad range of disciplines and have become to go-to uniform for many. This stylish cotton polo shirt combines field-tested resilience and top-tier tactical performance with their long-term experience making quality products in the tactical gear industry.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The Propper TAC.U Combat Shirt is loaded with innovative features. It starts off with a half-zip front that also has a loop fastener with an encased nametape on the back of the collar. The side panel has an underarm gusset for enhanced range of motion which results in an extremely free moving wearing experience.
A fully articulated elbow with external elbow pad openings ensures that your elbows are never uncomfortable. The double-layer stretch shoulder has additional shoulder pad pockets to provide extra padding to the shoulders so that they aren’t stressed out during hard labour. The vertical zipper pocket on each sleeve has a separate loop fastener patch for insignia. The left arm also has two additional pen pockets that are easily accessible.
The integrated dual cuff has a thumb hole with encased hook and loop fasteners. This boosts the already excellent functionality of the shirt and provides unmatched versatility. It also has multiple dual layer pockets on the sleeves to store anything and everything that you might ever need to carry on your body. This is besides the shoulder pad pockets that are double layered for enhanced stretching.
The shirt construction is inspired by military standards and the sleeves and collar feature durable Battle Rip fabric. It is made from an excellent blend of 65% polyester and 35% rip-stop cotton.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
This one is a much more casual offering by Tru-Spec. Its biggest USP is the dress shirt style tail that gives it a much more undercover look. This is one shirt that will not stand out as a tactical shirt.
Coming to its characteristics, the shirt features a Byron button down collar with buttons that are very cleverly hidden under the collar points. This is an important characteristic of tactical shirts and hiding it further helps the shirt to not stand out as tactical wear. It has pen pockets on each side of the button and this can be easily accessed through the front plackets. It’s excellent to be used as a concealed carry shirt. It features a yoked back for better fit and the shirt underarms additionally have vents to further help keep you dry and your body at the right temperature.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
This long sleeve T-Shirt is exactly what the title entails. It’s a simple long sleeve T-shirt by Rothco that comes with no brand tag on the front or back. This makes it an excellent choice for screen printing and just casual wear.
The shirt comes in plenty of military-inspired camouflage colour schemes and you’re honestly spoilt for choice here. It’s made of a comfortable 60% cotton, 40% polyester blend. Rothco is the foremost supplier of military, tactical, outdoor, survival clothing and gear. This expertise is reflected in the design and make of this T-shirt and is an excellent option for those looking for casual wear.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
Under Armour states that the idea to make this t-shirt started from just a simple idea to build a superior t-shirt and that’s exactly what they did. Using their expertise of manufacturing tactical gear of years, they’ve made a simple half-sleeve t-shirt that is far superior to most other t-shirts on the market today. They have bundled all their experience making tactical clothing from all their diverse product and made a simple t-shirt that can be worn anywhere, anytime for any purpose. It’s made from 100% polyester.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
This Rapid Assault Shirt is the perfect addition to 5.11’s popular Tactical Duty Uniform line. 5.11 has worked with an elaborate team of law enforcement officers and military personnel to develop the ultimate combat shirt for tactical and practical use. The body fabric is a lightweight poly/cotton/spandex knit that wicks perspiration and dries up very quickly.
5.11 has engineered mesh panels into the side of the shirt to improve air flow. This will help keep you cool and dry. The torso is form fitting without being tight or restrictive thanks to the premium stretch fabric. They’ve also utilized flat lock seams to reduce chafing and maximize comfort especially when you’re wearing it under body armour. The saddle shoulder construction allows for maximum range of motion regardless of your operation.
The sleeves are constructed of a tough poly/cotton rip stop fabric. The elbows are further articulated and reinforced for added durability. The large, dual shoulder pockets provide additional storage capacity and the half zip entry within the woven collar that can be worn up or down takes care of all your storage and accessibility needs. It is made from an incredible blend of 55% Cotton, 37% Polyester and 8% Knit Spandex.
The 5.11 Tactical Rapid Assault Shirt is the perfect addition to your tactical clothing wardrobe. Simply because a lot of thought and work has gone into it to ensure that you’re never left hanging.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
Tru-Spec says that this shirt provides the same durability and protection of a combat jacket but with the comfort of a short-sleeved tactical combat shirt. With Tru-Spec’s stellar experience in the field of designing and manufacturing tactical gear, one would a fool to doubt it. This tactical shirt is insanely comfortable and has an excellent fit. So much that it shouldn’t be a combat shirt at all.
Its design is based off the current military clothing design. The tactical shirt is made to provide protection while providing comfort under both body armour and vests. This fact alone is sure to make it a hit among military, law enforcement and fire-fighter individuals. The body of the shirt is made from 60% cotton and 40% Codura. The base layer fabric is made with no melt, no drip requirements. This ensure that you’re kept cool and dry and all moisture is wicked away from body. It dries super quickly too.
The front has a ¼ zipper which has a hooded covering to provide additional comfort and the two short sleeves have spacious shoulder pockets that are very well functional. The overall material used in the shirt is an excellent blend of 65% polyester and 35% cotton. This is one of the best short-sleeved tactical shirts that you can buy on the market today.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
This combat shirt is designed to complement an officer’s existing arsenal of equipment whilst presenting a sharp professional image in accordance with the standards of top-tier law enforcement units.
Its design is based off the current military clothing design. The tactical shirt is made to resist shrinkage and the superb quality of the fabric ensures that the colour never fades. This fact alone is sure to make it a hit among military, law enforcement and fire-fighter individuals. The body of the shirt is made from 60% cotton and 40% corduroy. The base layer fabric is thin and lightweight which makes wearing it for extended periods of time quite comfortable. This ensure that you’re kept cool and dry and all moisture is wicked away from body. It dries super quickly too.
The front has a ¼ zipper which has a hooded covering to provide additional comfort and the two long sleeves have spacious shoulder pockets that are very functional. The overall material used in the shirt is an excellent blend of 50% nylon and 50% cotton Codura brand fabric. This is one of the best combat shirts that you can buy on the market today.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
So there you go, a comprehensive list of the very best tactical shirts that you can buy on the marketplace today. These shirts are designed to be used and abused to the core in any environment. Even the ones which are lightweight and have thin fabrics will hold up really well against the atrocities of Mother Nature. Not to say, they’ll take any abuse you can dish out to them. They are tear and scratch resistant and most of them are also shrink resistant so you do not need to worry about washing them.
These pieces of clothing are designed to be worn the hell out of. Simply because they are great and that’s what they were designed to do. Most of them have multiple pockets, some of which are even concealed to help you carry those things which you normally wouldn’t. Few pieces of clothing are more versatile than this. And with this list, now you’re spoilt for choice. Choose whichever feels right and just get to that intensive workout or extreme game that you’ve always wanted to do!
E
xternal hard drives have now become a staple accessory in the backpack of most guys. It’s become that necessary travel accessory that you just can’t do without. And while travelling, rugged hard drives are the way to go, so that you can take them with you almost anywhere, regardless of the adventure and not have to worry about them falling apart or becoming unusable after a small fall or scrape. Rugged external hard drives are shockproof, durable and sturdy and come with a host of features that can even put some high-end non-rugged hard drives to shame. These hard drives ensure that your data stays safe regardless of where you go or how much abuse you give them (unknowingly of course). Further, most of these drives are small enough to fit into your pocket or the side compartment of your travel bag while being as robust as a tank.
However, even if you don’t do much travelling, or you work in a standard office, having a rugged hard drive can still be incredibly useful because HDDs die when they are dropped and you don’t want that. A rugged hard drive has extra protection or ‘armour’ that allows it to take some abuse while keeping the internal components safe.
We’ve compiled a list of the ten best rugged external hard drives you can buy today. All the drives listed here are military grade external hard drives and have a minimum capacity of 1TB, which is ideal for accomplishing most of your travel, adventure and entertainment needs. They follow the MIL-STD (mil-spec) standard to ensure ruggedness and durability. These rugged hard drives are a lot like conventional external hard drives, but they have extra durable bodies that allow them to withstand knocks and drops, and many will also be protected from extreme temperatures, water and dust.
But let us first look in detail at what makes an external hard drive ‘rugged’. We’ll also tell you what options you need to take into consideration to find the perfect military grade external hard drive for you. Also note that if you are planning to travel to or thorough wet or humid areas, buying a water resistant external hard drive might be the way to go. We’ve included a few in our list. Similarly, you should consider buying a dustproof external hard drive if you’re visiting coastal or desert areas. Most waterproof rugged external hard drives are also dustproof.
MIL-STD is a standard used by the United States Department of Defence to gauge the usability of a product for military uses. Although it was devised primarily for military use, we now see it being used for a lot of products commercially. The standard is set by taking into account multiple specifications of the products and then it is extensively tested before being declared military spec.
For instance, external hard drives are usually tested using the MIL-STD 810G 516.16 standard. Hard drives that pass this drop test are termed military grade or said to have military grade construction. There’s a world of difference between equipment that looks rugged, and equipment that’s built to take a spill. For selecting a hard drive with military grade construction, you need a device which was built to pass a military drop test known as MIL-STD-810G 516.6.
It’s a test which involves two-dozen drops into plywood, and devices which pass are built to survive at least a six-foot drop. The best way to choose is to read the online reviews of the product before you click on purchase.
So if you use a device that is MIL-STD rated, you can rest assured that it’ll hold up well against everyday use and abuse and then some more. For all your adventures and daring trips, using MIL-STD is the way to go, simply because that’s how they were designed. These hard-drives can survive at the least a six foot drop. Contrary to traditional hard drives, which are almost as fragile as smartphone screens.
To put this into perspective, we’ll first explain what a GB and a TB is. A gigabyte (1 GB) is 1000 megabytes (MB). The average photograph runs between 5 to 20 MB, depending on the camera. A high quality song or audio file averages around 10 to 20 MB, depending on the length and sharpness clarity etc. A 720p movie can easily be greater than 1 GB. Mostly a lot more, usually up to 3 GBs. So in a 1GB storage drive, you can store a few hundreds of songs and pictures. But probably not a movie.
1TB (or a terabyte) is 1000GB, and is usually the most expensive and highest storage capacity offered by a manufacturer, although one can now see external hard drives offering even 5TBs of storage. If you take into account the above information, you can easily store tens of thousands of songs, pictures, videos and hundreds of movies in a 1TB external hard disk. However, there are different variants that may increase or decrease the numbers shown. Low/high resolution photos or HD movies/videos may require less or more space. There also may be different mixtures of music, videos, photos and movies on your computer which may increase or decrease the storage space. You must also note that the actual usable size of a hard disk (whether internal or external) will be lower than the advertised size. For example, in a 1TB hard disk, 930-950 might only be usable.
Let us now look at the 10 best rugged external hard drives you can buy today.
The KESU 2.5” Portable External Hard Drive is a versatile and minimalistic hard drive that can be used with PCs, Macs and gamming consoles. Its plug and play which means that no software installation is required pre-usage.
It supports both USB 3.0 and USB 2.0 for ultra fast data transfer. This hard drive is by default formatted as ExFAT and as such can easily work with all operating systems. However, you can reformat it.
This military grade external hard drive is shockproof and waterproof and has been tested to withstand under high pressure. It comes in three colors and KESU also covers it for 3 years under their warranty program. And at 2.5”, it can easily fit into your pocket. You can choose storage capacities ranging from a paltry 80GB to mega 1TB.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The LaCie Rugged Mini Portable Hard Drive comes with certain unique features. A few of them being password protection (AES 256-bit) and a complimentary one-month membership to Adobe Creative Cloud All Apps Plan (must redeem by January 31, 2020).
The mil-spec hard drive can easily survive drops of up to six feet and is thoroughly waterproof. The bright shock-absorbing external sleeve is its first layer of protection in the event of a fall. Underneath that lies an anti-scratch casing made from a high-quality aluminium chassis. Lastly, the internal rubber bumps are capable of absorbing forces up to 1000 Gs (hint: that’s a lot).
In terms of connectivity, it supports both USB 3.0 and USB 2.0 and can also be opted with the Thunderbolt 3.0, triple slot or USB-C type connections. The drive ranges from 500 GB of space to 5 TB of space that can be optioned also with the Thunderbolt Raid and Thunderbolt USB-C connections.
The final trump card is the option of an eco-mode which can significantly reduce battery consumption of whatever device the hard drive is plugged into. This can result in massive battery savings for simple tasks such as watching a movie, especially on smaller devices like smartphones. It offers a lot of options and also comes with Seagate’s trusted 2 year data rescue service (included in warranty).
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The Silicon Power Black 1TB Rugged Portable External Hard Drive Armor A60 sports an ultra-rugged rubber casing that ensures protection against shocks and water. It has an internal suspension system to guard against drops and it can easily survive a six feet drop.
The specially textured surface ensures that the drive cannot be damaged by scratches or smudged by fingerprints. The Armor A60 is IPX4 splash resistant and it offers complete protection against spraying water.
This hard drive also supports gaming consoles and can be used as a good alternative to your console’s internal storage. Connectivity via USB 3.0 with backwards compatibility takes care of transfer speeds. The military grade external hard drive is formatted to FAT32 and supports both Mac and Windows.
The best part is that it features a cable-carry design to ensure that you never lose your cable again! It is backed by Silicon Power’s solid 3-year warranty plan.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The Silicon Power 2TB Rugged Portable External Hard Drive Armor A80 has been designed specifically to cater to adventurous (or clumsy) gamers. It’s compatible with all next-gen gaming consoles and even a few previous gen consoles.
The aluminium casing can withstand up to 300kgs of pressure and it also contains a rubber frame to achieve military-grade shockproof standards. Its super light and has a sleek cable-carry design wherein the cable goes inside the aluminium casing making it invisible until you need it. The Armor A80 is not merely shockproof, it’s also rigorously waterproofed (IPX7), dustproofed and can survive drops of up to 3 metres.
Connection is achieved by a backwards compatible USB 3.1 connector. It’s a 3 inch USB Type-C to Type-A nylon braided connector (for extra durability) that can be easily secured into the storage cubby at the side of the hard drive. There’s also an LED light to indicate data transfer and power functions.
Your data can be protected with AES 256-bit encryption with the SP widget software that also enables cloud storage. It also comes bundled with Silicon Power’s 3 year warranty. The Armor A80 can be had in several striking varieties to complement your style.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
This rugged military spec external hard drive comes in three different colours and has a few unique features that sets it apart from the rest of the crowd. It features an advanced 3-stage shock protection system that includes a silicone rubber case, internal shock-absorbing suspension damper, and reinforced hard casing.
It also sports an advanced internal hard drive suspension system with a reconnect button that eliminates the need to unplug and insert after safely ejecting the hard disk. There’s a one-touch auto-backup button 256-bit AES file and folder encryption (password protection).
Connection is mated through a backwards compatible USB 3.1 interface. Transcend has also thrown in its Elite file management and RecoveRx data recovery software along with its 3 year limited warranty to give you extra peace of mind.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The Armor A85 sports one of the sleekest designs offered by Silicon Power. It features a seamless rubber material and uni-body design that also helps it to have anti-slip properties. It’s compatible with most gaming consoles and uses a USB C Type connector to facilitate data transfer between computers and mobile devices such as smartphones and tablets.
It is equipped with an advanced 3 layer defence system that includes the metallic exterior, the rubber case in between and an internal suspension system to protect it against shocks and crashes. The IP68 rating ensures that is both dustproof, and waterproof. The aluminium casing can withstand up to 500kg of force making it one of the strongest military grade hard drives on the market.
It features a cable-carry design like its siblings and comes bundled with a full disk encryption software (SP HDD Lock Utility) and Silicon Power’s 3 year manufacture warranty.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
Another MIL Spec external hard drive is the HD710 Pro by ADATA. It features a cable-carry design and is military grade waterproof (IP68) and shockproof. The HD710 pro also has IP6X certification for total dust-tight protection, meaning it’s completely dustproof.
To top it all off, the HD710 Pro has an ergonomic water cover to protect its USB ports. It has three layers, with a shock absorbing buffer separating the outer silicon shell and the inner tough plastic shell. It can survive falls of up to 1.5 metres.
The extra feature of the HD710 is the G Shock Vibration sensing technology. This stops all the moving parts in the disk if a shock is detected. You’re kept informed of the disk’s actions by the LED indicator mounted on the surface of the HD710.
It also features a nifty cable storage area with a grove that runs around its body. You just need to wrap it around the hard disk when not in use. Simple, clutter free and convenient. Connection is routed through a backwards compatible USB 3.0 and the rugged external hard disk is backed up by a 3 year warranty from ADATA.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The Storejet 25H3B is another MIL-Spec offering by Transcend. It features a three-stage shock protection system wherein the royal blue outer shell is made up of a slip-resistant silicone material, which is then reinforced by a hard casing and an internal hard drive suspension damper – all designed to reduce forces of impact and provide maximum shock-absorption. The rugged design is lightweight and quite easy to carry.
Connection is routed through a USB 3.0 connector with backward compatibility. It also features a one-touch Auto-Backup button wherein you can initiate a backup just by clicking on it.
This military spec external hard disk also bundles with an AES 256-bit encryption to protect your data through Transcend Elite Data Management and this software also enables you to use your external hard disk as digital lock for your personal computer. The 25H3B is shipped with Transcend’s 3 year limited warranty.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The Armor A30 is another versatile offering by Silicon Power. It’s built with silica gel and incorporates an internal suspension system which ensures that it’s protected against all sorts of crushes and shocks.
The most vulnerable corners of the Armos A30 are comprised of silicone material, building from the internal structure to the exterior, adding an extra shield to withstand crushes and shocks.
It also features a cable wrap around design and an LED indicator. The hexagonal surface design provides further protection against scratches and dust particles. It comes with USB 3.0 with backwards compatibility for blazing fast transfers.
Silicon Power offers a 3 year warranty for the product. It also comes with two cables, Type C to Type A and Type A to Type A for added compatibility.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The Armor A15 is yet another MIL-Spec offering by Silicon Power. It achieves shock protection by an internal suspension system with silica gel in its most vulnerable corners. It’s guarded by an ultra-rugged rubber casing that also lends it anti-slip properties.
The A15 also comes with a host of software features. Probably more than any other hard disk on this list. It has 256-bit AES encryption (courtesy of SP widget), a one-touch quick-backup button and even cloud storage. The data management software SP widget also performs backup and restore functions besides enabling encryption and cloud storage.
It also has an LED status indicator and USB 3.0 connector with backward compatibility. Silicon Power provides a 3 year warranty for the Armor A15.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
So there you go, the ten best mil-spec external hard drives you can buy on the market today. These hard drives ensure that no matter what mess you get into, your data doesn’t get messed up or get lost in the mess.
You can use them as an essential component of your tech gear or even as a travel accessory. The encrypted drives are great for storing confidential files and you can have the added peace of mind of always keeping it on you, rather than in your office or home computer. And for our gamers out there, you now don’t have the haggle of carrying all your game disks along with the already bulky console whenever you travel.
Go ahead and buy your military spec hard drive right now! You might discover a few uses that you never thought about or maybe some even we’ve failed to mention. You never know. Protect your data using any one of the drives we’ve listed so that you never have to worry about data security again.
W
hile many Android users have been taking advantage of wireless charging for a few years now, Apple has recently joined the revolution. They did this with iPhone 8 and iPhone X, both relatively new to the tech world. Despite the newer Apple phones out today, the iPhone X still remains the talk of the town. Thus, people want to charge them up even more for their great usage. However, finding iPhone X wireless chargers is not exactly easy.
We’re perfectly aware of this. Yet this is why we have an article out on the subject. To some, it might be tough to know what wireless charging actually is. It’s not too difficult to understand, as it’s merely placing your phone on a pad or dock. This is the part plugged into the wall, and your phone remains free. No more fiddling with wires!
It is important to note that iPhone X wireless chargers support three different speeds. 5W is the standard for most wireless chargers. However, the faster versions at 7.5W and 10W are now available.
“Faster charging” means that the device receives more than the standard 5 watts of power transfer. With a 7.5-watt charger, the iPhone X sees a 50% charge within a half hour. Meanwhile, it would take the standard 5W up to 2 hours to accomplish this. That is why having a faster charger can make a huge difference if you have a busy schedule.
Most of the wireless chargers are quite similar, so you might be more influenced by price when deciding to buy one. Don’t be, as price does not dictate the best chargers. Check out our guide below as well as the FAQs to learn more!
Phone manufacturers are continually refining their algorithms to improve their products. This led them to Inductive wireless charging and how it operated. Basically, chargers generate a lot of heat due to the higher wattages here. Once they pass certain temperatures, the power threshold is reduced and slows down the charge.
These iPhone X wireless chargers have a built-in fan to keep temps down for this reason.
iPhone X wireless chargers transfer energy from the dock or pad to a receiver in the back of the phone via electromagnetic induction. The dock creates an alternating electromagnetic field by using an induction coil. The receiver coil present in the phone then converts the field into electricity which is fed into the battery.
To work correctly, both the charger and phone have to be in close proximity to each other and be correctly aligned.
The speed at which your phone will charge on one is affected by a number of factors, including that correctly aligned dock mentioned earlier.
There are a few other factors which affect the speed of wireless charging; the phone needs to be perfectly aligned with the dock. Every charging pad or dock has built-in sensor coils which need to be aligned with your phone to begin charging. Some pads have one coil only while other wireless chargers can have up to three coils built in them.
Some wireless chargers have a slippery surface which makes it difficult for your phone to stay in one place and interferes with its charging process. You can avoid this issue by either buying a non-slip charger pad or by keeping your phone in its case while charging.
In most cases, wireless charging is slower than using traditional cable wire chargers. But this only holds true for the standard 5W chargers. If you want to charge your phone quickly, it is recommended to buy a fast charger such as 7W or 10W ones.
Traditional chargers may take more than 4 hours to recharge iPhone X or 8 completely but using a 7.5W the charging time is reduced to half or even less than that.
Traditional chargers need to be plugged in, and they end up damaging your phone’s jock in the long term. Wireless chargers do not require plugging in any wire which keeps your phone in perfect condition for longer.
Wireless chargers are typically rated by wattage or output amperage with a 5V wireless charger comparable to a typical 1A USB charger (like the one that comes with iPhone 7).
The new high-powered wireless chargers are capable of recharging larger batteries smartphones in less than two hours.
The short answer to this question is no; you can charge your iPhone X with its cover on any wireless dock or pad as long as there is no metal in the case. Any metal sticker or magnetic phone mount won’t allow the phone to charge.
Qi is a method of inductive charging which works at farther distances than from transmission point. It uses a system of magnetic coils which have both a receiver and a transmitter. If your phone case is made of metal or has any metal piece in it, it will negatively affect the transmitters ability to send signals.
Even a tiny magnetic plate used in car mounts will diminish the charging capabilities of a wireless pad.
When searching for a wireless charger for your phone, try to find one that is Qi certified, and you will have no problem charging your phone in its case. Cheap chargers which do not specifically state that they are Qi certified will cause you some case charging grief.
It will also cause trouble when aligning your phone to the wireless dock; causing the charging process to slow down or completely stop.
There are many wireless charger manufacturers who try to pass their products off as supporting Qi standards. For a product to get Qi certified it has to pass many rounds of testing to receive the certification. If you are unsure, check out the WPC website which updates its list of approved devices every hour.
If there is one thing I have learned in my life is that it’s better to spend a little bit more when buying a high-end product than to buy a cheap alternative. You will simply end up spending more when you will have to repair or replace it. So, it’s best to stick to high-end, certified products if you want to save money in the long run.
The TNSO wireless charger is a game changer when it comes to wireless chargers; it can lie flat or tilt upwards, so you can place your phone against it vertically. Its unique design allows you to charge your cell phone laying it down horizontally or stacking it vertically. You can take calls, watch videos and view updates while keeping your hands-free.
TNSO charger comes in matt black color which blends perfectly into any backgrounds whether you keep it at home or at work; it is sure to jazz up your space. Depending on your needs, you can use this charger to recharge your phone at a standard 5W output, or it also works as a fast charger with 10W.
It is one of the fastest wireless chargers for iPhone X.
It has a smart chip that’s built-in to protect against overheating, over-charging and short circuit. It falls on the cheaper end of the spectrum when it comes to price.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The Chuanghuike wireless charger is a sleek charger with a futuristic design that is affordably priced. It is compatible with iPhone X, 8 and 8 plus along with Samsung S9, S8, S8+, S7, S7 edge and Note 5. You can fully charge your phone within three hours without any hassle of plugging in a cord.
It is an ultra slim charger with no annoying beeps that can be carried easily in your handbag. It comes with an 18-month warranty from the date of purchase so that you can buy it without any worry in mind.
Chuanghuike wireless charger has a smart LED light for showing different charging status. The red light indicates the phone is in standby mode whereas the blue light shows up when the phone is charging. This charger works best with a 2A adapter which you will need to purchase separately.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
Kuppet is a Qi wireless certified charger which is compatible with a broad range of phones including iPhone X,8, 8 Plus, Samsung S9, S8, S7, S6 edge and Google Nexus 4,5 and 6. It has a slim design which comes with a micro USB cable that you can connect with your laptop.
The Kuppet wireless charger is a savvy piece of equipment for all your charging needs, and what’s more, it does not give off any distracting lights while you sleep. Simply put your phone on the pad and sleep peacefully while it charges your phone.
Its circular design makes it highly versatile; allowing you to charge many other wireless devices without the hassle of cable or wires. The package comes complete with a user manual, wireless charger pad, and a micro USB.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
Trim dish wireless charger has a matt black disc-shaped design. It has an anti-slip rubber on the bottom to keep it in place and air vents to keep the charger cool while working. Trim dish offers wireless chargers with three different outputs 5, 7.5 and 10 watts.
It is compatible with iPhone X, 8, 8 plus (10watts) and Samsung S9, S8, S7, S6 edge, Note 5. Just connect the wireless charger with adapter and place your phone in the middle to charge it.
Trim dish wireless charger comes with a 3ft micro USB cable which is long enough to place the charger on your bedside table or office desk.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The Turbot wireless charger is a smart solution for charging all your Qi devices. It has three built-in sensing coils which offer you a much wider charging area and a stand which helps to keep the phone in place.
Turbot wireless charger is compatible with all the popular phones including iPhone X, 8, 8+, Samsung S9, S8, S7, S6, S6 edge, Sony Xperia XZ2, Nexus 4,5,6,7 and Nokia Lumia 920/928/1020/1520. It requires a 2A adapter for best results, and it is also recommended to remove your phone case while charging.
Turbot charger’s unique design makes it easy for users to use their phone’s hands-free while it’s charging. The three built-in sensing coils enhance its charging capacity.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
Belkin is a Qi-certified wireless charger that is shaped like a disc or a plate. It comes with a wall adapter and a micro USB cable. You enjoy fast wireless charging by placing your phone on the non-slip surface with this 5-watt charger.
A green LED light is turned on when the phone is correctly aligned on the base and is charging. It’s compact design, and light weight makes it easy to carry around.
Belkin wireless charger is universally compatible with Qi phones and devices including iPhone X/8/8+ and Samsung S9/S8/S7/S6/S6 Edge and Google Nexus 6/5/4. You do not need to remove your phone case as it is compatible with most 3mm cases which do not have any metal in them.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The Dooker wireless charger has a transparent futuristic design that is shaped like a coffee cup coaster. It begins charging the moment you put your phone on it. The simple round design gives it a sleek modern appearance, and 2.25 ounces makes it one of the lightest wireless chargers available in the market.
It is compatible with a wide array of phones including iPhone X/8/8+, Samsung Galaxy S9. S8, S7, S6, S6 Edge, LG Nexus, Motorola and a few Blackberry models.
This charger supports 5W output which makes it a standard charger. This charger takes about 3-4 hours to recharge an iPhone X completely.
Dooker wireless charger is a safe device, according to the manufacturer, as it is approved by FCC, RoHS, and CE. It protects against over-charging, over-heating, over/under voltage so that your phone gets damaged.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The Vuker wireless charger is a complete package when it comes to design, price, and performance. It has a simple white disc-shaped design which is aesthetically pleasing and costs less than $15. It has small air vents at the back which protect it from overheating.
A blue light turns on to show that the wireless charger is working. It also has four small rubbers attached to its base to prevent it from slipping.
It is available in 5-watt and 7-watt outputs; making it compatible with an extensive variety of phones and devices. Samsung Galaxy S9, S8, S7, S6, iPhone X/8/8+, LG Nexus, G2. G3, G4, Moto Droid Maxx/mini/turbo, HTC Rezound are all compatible with the Vuker charger.
The Vuker wireless charger generates 50% less heat due to its unique thermal design. It is made with high-quality copper wires which have longer diameters to support faster charging.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The Anker wireless charger has a matt black disc-shaped design. It is compatible with all Qi devices and reduces charging time by 10% as compared to other 5-watt chargers. Anker’s world-renowned technology makes it convenient to recharge your phone while in its case.
You no longer have to waste time taking the phone’s case off or putting it back on.
Anker wireless charger does not give off any stray radiations and protects your phone from overheating. It is compatible with iPhone X, iPhone 8/8 Plus, Samsung Galaxy S9 / S9+ /S8 / S8 Plus /Note 8 / S7 / S7 edge / S6 edge+ / Note 5 and Nokia Lumia 830 / 920 / 1020 / 1520 / 930.
Anker has designed its charger to provide protection against overheating, short-circuit and is fully certified by CE, FCC, and RoHS.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
If you are wondering which wireless charger is a best seller on Amazon, then Yootech takes the cake! The Yootech wireless charger is easy on the eyes as its aesthetically pleasing and the disc shape makes it extremely portable.
The Yootech wireless charger is compatible with most android and apple phones including Samsung Galaxy S6, S7, S8, S9, Note 5 and iPhone X/8/8+. Yootech is designed to be sleep-friendly; it does not create any noise while charging and the LED also turns off after the phone begins charging.
This wireless charger’s design is 0.47inches in thickness which helps to enhance its temperature control feature. The intelligent microchip built inside this charger provides heat control, surge protection and short-circuit protection.
It also comes with an 18-month manufacturer warranty, so you can have peace of mind when buying this wireless charger.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
Android users have been enjoying wireless charging for a while now whereas only the latest Apple phones have joined the league recently. Several manufacturers have partnered with Apple to design fast chargers which support all Qi compatible devices.
However, Apple is only keeping wireless pads from Belkin and Mophie in its outlets.
Options from other manufacturers will improve with time as they roll out their own chargers which are likely to be certified under Apple’s MFi program. When buying a wireless charger, it is recommended to look for WPC certification which allows manufacturers to provide verification that their products comply with the latest Qi specifications.
However, a missing Qi logo or lack of WPC certification does not necessarily mean that a wireless charger is substandard in performance. There are many non-certified wireless chargers available in the market which are quite popular among users.
We at Men’s Gear encourage that you look up any potential purchases in the WPC database, so you can stay safe from risks of overheating and short circuit while charging. This will help you narrow down your choice for a wireless charger that meets your requirements and is completely safe as well.
A
s the old saying goes, “you’re only as strong as your weakest link.” Meaning if you want to look good all day in your formal dress, then you need to know how to wear proper tie pins.
Tie pins were almost forgotten in men’s clothing, we’re not sure why. Now, they’re gaining new life as brands begin to revamp this classic accessory. Menswear designers are now coming up with new models to add to the gentlemanly accessories more than ever.
You can add corporate aesthetics with a simple tie pin. The metal tie pin was born out of the idea of keeping ties securely in place. Thus, they are not a merely convenient accessory, but classy wardrobe enhancers.
With basic tie pins, everything stays in place once you slide one on your tie and shirt. If you’re a man that prefers more delicate, thinner neckwear fabric, this will be a perfect fashion accessory for you. Versions of tie pins are numerous.
The tie clip is similar to a cloth peg that holds the tie in place. Though slightly technical because of its spring mechanism, it may be ideal for you if you like to wear bulkier knitted ties. The tie chain is merely a chain that helps to hold things together in a stylish way. Then there’s the tie bar, a stylish yet small and solid bar that goes on your tie.
For those who focus more on fashion than practicality, you will like the tie tack. Think of those tacks you put your posters up with at home for years. Now imagine it has something to catch and hold it in place. This, basically, is the tie tack.
We’ve rounded up some of the types out there. Let’s get down for more details.
This is really a great question! As a man, you must have finally recognized the classic tie pin as one of the most stylish, yet practical pieces of jewelry worn to accessorize formal wear. Your tie pin must be well-positioned precisely even though it is apparent that tie pins are easy to use.
You will see that you will be adding a stylish finish to your formal wear when you wear it correctly. If you’re ready to wear your tie pin like a pro, here are the steps you need to take.
First, let’s get to know the exact position to wear a tie pin. To do that, you first have to remove the tie pin back by drawing the tapered end to release the pin. Just so you know, it is highly essential to position your tie pin in the center of the tie, in the middle, or a little higher on your chest.
Slightly higher on your chest or the midsection, find one of the button holes on your shirt and lock up the back of the tie pin by tugging the tapered edge to clutch the pin.
Now we’re getting to the fun part. Where you place your tie pin is enough to make your entire look, yet it could also hurt it. It is ideal to place your tie pin between the third and fourth buttons of your shirt. That is around the middle to the bottom of your sternum.
A word of caution here, you’re likely to render the functional accessory ineffectual if you clip too high. You can look a bit awkward if you clip too low as well. All the same, having a higher placement can give you a slimming effect while playing safe within a lower placement can create a more classic outcome.
Remember the position of your jacket buttons at the top when you’re clipping your tie pin. You’ll want to be sure you’re not going to go all the way up to where your tie can barely be seen. What the point of wearing any tie pins if they are not visible, right? Also, if you wear a vest, you’ll need to keep it in mind before putting the tie pin on.
We recommend getting fully dressed where your complete look is done. Even your hair is all good to go as well as your teeth brushed! Then place the tie pin on at this moment. You’ll be able to see where your jacket buttons and vest will be seen. You’ll even know how much of your tie can be seen.
This will allow you to place the tie pin in the best area, without putting it in an awkward place.
With many items that have gained popularity over the years, types begin to form. This allows us to see new types of products that are similar to the original. In the case of tie pins, they have been around for an insanely long time. They were originally worn by wealthy British men in the mid to late 1800’s.
Ties were not quite enough for the wealthy men of the nation, as several were able to afford one by this time period. Either that or they could always make their own. It was not as easy to “make” tie pins, especially ones of major quality that used raw materials of major status. The wealthy could, which is why the tie pin phenomena took off.
Due to their upper-class appearance, they began to become something used by well to do people around the world. Eventually, this led to places having an abundance, with several cheaper versions being made too. While there are still some higher priced versions, tie pins are no longer expensive as a rule.
In this time of development, new types would emerge. That leads us to the versions you best know today, so let’s get into those.
They are a bit more formal and old-fashioned. Don’t get us wrong, they’re a terrific way to add a little detail to a tie. They’re just not as common as what many men use today if we’re honest. They have to be pretty dynamic to stand out over normal tie pins.
Tie tacks are like medium buttons that are used to pierce the material of the tie. You can fasten them through the back of the tie and the front portion clips in place to have a solo basic jewelry look on the tie. The Tie tacks do not need to have any bars connect them or anything of the sort.
They look and act exactly like the tack on the wall mentioned earlier.
This type of tie pin is also known as a slide clasp. If you like, it can go parallel to a money clip. Non-hinged tie pins are long pieces of metal that are bent in a U-shape. It pushes the two edges closer together. What checks your tie pin is the thickness of your tie’s material.
You may not have enough pressure to hold your tie pin in place in case you’re using an extremely skinny tie. In those cases, tie tacks work just as well.
It’s absolutely possible to compare hinged tie pin with an alligator’s mouth or a clothes peg. Hinged tie pin comprises two bars that are connected with a spiral method. To open one edge, you only need to pinch it, slide the pin onto your tie and shirt, and then let loose!
You will take a fancy to imbue a bit more pressure for this kind of pins to make them stay in position.
You may want to ask if a tie bar should go all the way across the width of the tie. Relax, because the rules are quite simple when it comes to proper length of the tie. When you stand in your natural posture, it is essential that the tip of your tie touch your belt or your actual waistline. The ending of the latter is more preferred.
A good rule of thumb to remember is that your tie must be tied in equivalent to your waistline and torso length. In case you’re sporting a square tie, let it pass the top of the waistband or belt.
You must get the ensemble right because certain subtle details are vital to bringing the whole thing together. You will know if your tie is too long when it extends way past the belt or waistline. When it is too short, you will be able to see the tie ends to reveal your shirt fabric and your waistline itself.
Make sure the tip of your tie sits in the midsection of the belt and waistline. You can cap it all with a simple strategy of stepping back and take a quick look in the mirror to check your tie after you’ve tied it.
The Lystaii 3pcs Tie Bar Clip is ideal for business professional fashion. It has a value package of 3 tie clips that come in 3 colors: black, gold, and silver. All are suitable for your diverse needs. These tie pins have a high-quality stainless steel material that’s durable and can endure day-to-day wear.
The size of the clips ranges from 2.2” to 0.2” / 5.5cm x 0.6cm. They have sturdy spring that can hold down the ties and prevent them from sliding down, even for thicker material.
You don’t have to worry about damaging any expensive fabric with these tie pins. This is due to their spring tension, which helps prevent it. You just have to look stylish and professional. The springs are critical to things and help to avoid chaos flutter. These tie pins even help to keep the ties clean looking.
Not only is keeping your tie tidy is vital to avert some embarrassing situation, but Lystaii’s tie pins also pose to be a reflection of modern fashion, more taste, and the men’s gentlemen style.
No need to worry about your tie flying off when you bend your knees. These tie pins have both formal and stylish features that give a neat and refreshing feeling, getting rid of any awkward situation. If you want to look charming and mature, you may want to consider wearing this type of tie pin. You’ll certainly look fashionable if nothing else.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
Geek-M Fashion Necktie Clips are stainless steel and come in simple yet fashionable models. Typically with 2.3” in length and 0.23” in width, they are high-quality and durable.
If you’re looking for simple and elegant tie pins suitable for both formal and casual occasions, Geek-M has you covered. Their elegant necktie accessories clip a tie to your shirt and ensure that it’s secured and hung straight.
Be aware that you may not have the perfect picture of the item due to the differences between different monitors. You may also want to ignore the Amazon shipping time and select the suitable shipping as needed. For those in the United States, it can take up to 15 days for the item ordered to arrive.
Like most Amazon sellers, Geek-M assures customer satisfaction, striving to put their all into resolving any issues.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
GWD seem to make some impressive tie pins. We’re big fans of these, and we would not be shocked if you were too. These tie pins come in three pieces as well as black, grey, and silvers tones. They’re designed with copper and have a packaging like those of gift boxes.
The three pieces set of high-quality tie pins are 2.1 inches each. They have an elegant and terrific texture that make them perfect for any guy, regardless of the occasion.
If you desire an excellent gentlemanly style, then GWD’s tie pins will do justice to that. Their product is also good as a gift because of that exquisite gift box packaging we referenced. We have a feeling we have every guy an idea for their father’s birthday or Christmas present this year.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
Jstyle has four pieces of regular ties and necktie clips that are suitable for wedding and business styles. Their tie pins of 2.3 inches are classic with a simple design that extends to the length of an average size tie. The tie pins are great for any gentleman who likes variety, as it comes with 4 different colors per set.
These tie pins have a well finished and classic style most men will enjoy. The remarkable thing about Jstyle tie pins is that they are good on both social and business events. What’s more, their sturdy exquisite clasps work well on different types of ties.
Their classic tie clips are designed to never go out of style with graceful design parts that go well with different suits.
They’re built to last, so long as you take care of them by not putting them in compromising positions. These tie pins will work properly on any tie, regardless of thickness too. It just takes properly applying them to accomplish this. They also adhere to standard sizes that are definitely great for common ties.
They crown their super satisfaction with a 90-day money back guarantee. You can also make an exchange if that works best.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
Ever wanted a classic sailor knot, perfect for all kinds of shirts and necktie? You know, the kind of tie knot that’s great for wedding, business, party, banquet, and daily use? Well, the Hawson Sailor Knot Tie Tack For Men may be all you need.
Their tie pins or tie knots come in different sizes. Their 10mm model comes with a chain and the 52mm model is packaged with a black gift box. Hawson has even worked hard to find perfect colors to match your outfits. They have a gold version that has some darker blue or black within. Along with this is a silver and rose gold model.
It performs the same function as normal tie pins or tie bars, as it’s made to hold the tie close just as they are.
You don’t have to bother about your tie dropping to the ground when bending over or blown by the wind. If you want to look sharp and tasteful, Hawson’s classic and simple sailor knot design adds some real style to your look.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The MeShow classic collar pin is made of brass with a ball-shaped collar pin. The total length of this model is approximately 2.56 inches. Their collar pin sizes range from 2.28 inches to 1.89 inches, and it’s 0.39 in width. The product package includes two pieces of ball-shaped collar pins. Meanwhile, these tie pins come in the colors of gold and silver.
Certain curiosity arises whether MeShow collar pin is a needle or a bar. This is due to the screw on the ball. It’s actually a bit of both if we’re honest.
You may have the challenge of getting shirts with little holes made into the collar that will accommodate the straight bar. This happens sometimes. Even though a spring type of mechanism holds the left and right collar points together, there appear to be no holes on either type of the collar bar.
The collar pin is easy to use when being added to your tie. All you need to do is to insert the two straight collar pins through the holes that have been already manufactured in the collar. Next, screw on the ball at the edge.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
JOVIVI tie pins and necktie bar are made of stainless steel. They tend to come in a set of 7 to 10 tie pins upon purchase as well. This makes them a perfect for a gift on a wedding, graduation, bachelor party, anniversary, and other occasions.
The package of the tie pins even includes a gift box for a cool presentation. Their package is also ideal for Christmas and Father’s Day.
Their tie clip sizes vary from 2.28 inches to 2.36 inches long with 0.2 in width. The necktie clip is an excellent fashion accessory that you can use to clip your tie to your shirt, ensuring it suspends straight and keeps it protected in position.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The Xydstay 10 Pack Tie Keeper is designed from highly durable plastic with zero curl or warps. This item won’t even break in low temperatures. These affordable tie pins come 10 to a set and keep your tie where it needs to be without fail for hours on end. The Tie Keeper model is a nice alternative to the lapel or loop in the back of ties.
Plus, these tie pins blend in well with most styles and colors that shirts and ties will be in. This is a perfect choice for business and social events alike.
As an ideal accessory, they keep your tie from falling off even if you’re standing or walking. It offers a solution to the issues of tie getting wrinkled or the chains breaking or getting loose during a meeting. The tie holder keeps the tie straight all the time. Even though it is not meant to be visible, it’ll keep things in place well.
It is simple to use by just attaching it to your shirt’s buttons or through the back loop of your tie. Since it comes in different sizes, you can easily draw comfort by putting the tie keeper in a suitable place or location you want.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The Vellete set is a combination of four tie pins and eight collar stays. They are all in four versatile and classy designs needed. The eight collar stays are made of stainless steel with smooth edges that are hard to rip through your collars.
Four of those collars have sizes of 2.2 inches and 2.5 inches each. For any man that cares about his look, Vellete’s quality and an economical combination make it a perfect gift.
Having absolute attention to details speaks a volume about a man’s look, plus this model is completely affordable. That’s why Vellete ensures that each item they produce goes through rigorous quality control. It obviously must meet the highest in industry standards.
Their collars are designed with 201 stainless steel for strength and durability.
Not only that, the item goes through a heavy polishing system to guarantee smooth edges that won’t rip through shirts. Their tie pins are made of sturdy brass for longevity. The tie clips also feature a spring clasp closure that doesn’t slide off the ties.
Talking about the latest trending styles, they also put a lot of time into the design process to make sure it meets industry standards.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
Hawson’s Men’s Crystal Tie Tack was created with copper and plated in gold and white crystal. It comes in different sizes such as 7mm for the crystal and 52mm for the chain. All coming with a black gift box as a package. Their tack tie button perfectly pins the tie. It’s so tiny it won’t cover the color of your necktie, yet it holds the tie firmly.
In case you’re bored with tie pins, you can easily switch to their tie tack that can adapt to any kind of occasion.
If you dread your tie from flowing around, you can try their tie tack with the chain to keep your necktie close to your shirt. Now it is easy to create a luxury look with their gold plated base tie tack, along with colorful zircon. While the little tie tack won’t cover the color of your tie, it will also attach gloss to your look and make it tasteful and elegant.
T
ennis is an incredibly graceful, skillful and beautiful game to watch when it’s played properly. It can be captivating and exciting and that’s part of why so many people want to start playing it. Who could argue with just how amazing Roger Federer is on a good day? There’s reasons why some people consider him to not only be the best tennis player of his generation, but the best sportsman overall.
However, if you’ve been playing for a while, or just starting this sport, you’ll soon figure out that it’s a lot more grueling and taxing on the body. All that running, all that ducking and diving and returning those ground strokes, backhand smashes, punishing serves and deadly spinners takes its toll. Hamstring and tendon pulls are just two of the issues, along with another you may have heard of, tennis elbow.
Therefore, you may have armed yourself with that killer racket and may even have those cool tennis shoes, but have you given some thought to protection for your elbows? In this guide that’s what we’re going to look at, the best tennis elbow braces on the market. Now, there’s a wide selection of different tennis elbow braces available on the market right now – so many so that there’s an overwhelming selection to choose from. That’s where we help though.
We’ve managed to whittle down the selection to a solid 17. These 17 are the best on the market. So, you’ll be able to find one that meets your needs and budget nicely. As an interesting aside, if you’ve yet to invest in a racket or shoes, you should check out our great guides covering both the best tennis shoes of and best tennis rackets of 2018.
As stated by WebMD, tennis elbow is a kind of tendinitis or swollen tendons. The condition can cause pain in the arm and elbow. The tendons are collections of tough tissue that connect your lower arm bones to the relevant muscles. Although it’s called ‘tennis elbow,’ it’s possible to get it from several other things outside of tennis.
Essentially, any repetitive activities involving a gripping action, particularly if the first two fingers and thumb are involved, can result in tennis elbow. It can also come into play with merely swinging your arm over long periods of time, as well as other sports like golf, basketball, and much more.
When you’re playing tennis and gripping that racket, you can put too much stress on the tendons, straining your muscles. Over the course of time, the constant tugging on the tendons and muscles can cause tiny tissue tears. It’s possible to develop tennis elbow if you participate in:
Furthermore, even hobbies or small outside chores you might do around the house could cause tennis elbow. Those activities are:
Symptoms are often the first thing people notice for anything wrong with them. You know your body better than anyone, even your doctor. That is why they have to ask YOU the questions in order to help you out. That said, symptoms for problems the body may have could be minor or simply due to age.
This causes several people, ESPECIALLY MEN, to ignore the signs something might be wrong. They refuse to go to the doctor and look into it. As if can hurt to be sure. This isn’t Monte Python, as some things are not “merely a flesh wound.” Tennis Elbow can really be hard to notice right away.
The reason for such an issue is that symptoms often start light and develop into more painful issues over time. You may even start to lose the ability to move it normally. Yet this won’t come right away usually. What should you look out for so you can properly be prepared for the possibility of tennis elbow?
Tenderness and pain in that bony knob-like part on the outside of your elbow are the most common first symptom. This might be lighter at first, as mentioned. Don’t ignore it, as your body is communicating with you here. This is the area where the bone is connected to the tendons, so it’s very important to pay attention to.
The subsequent pain can radiate to the lower or upper arm. Even with the damage occurring in your elbow, you may find it difficult to do things with your hands. This is commonly due to inflammation and possible nerve trouble that can develop.
It’s more likely to develop if you’re performing the same activities time and time again, such as swinging a racket. After all, there’s no way around stopping that from happening. It’s a pretty important part of the whole game. As mentioned beforehand, it’s not as if Tennis is the only place where this can happen.
Here’s another thing you’ll hate about it. You can get tennis elbow issues even if you’re in great shape. In fact, people in the best shape who have gone to the gym for years will likely develop some version of it. Why is this? Just like with what happens in tennis, it’s all about repeatability. Your elbows are heavily needed to do anything with your arms.
Arm curls, for example, are done to add muscle and typically assist your bicep and tricep growth. Throughout this, your elbow has to be the main support bone that almost spots for the tendons. Bodybuilders can develop several issues like bone chips or bone spurs in the arms. In fact, it’s incredibly common.
Tennis elbow would be the easiest to get yet the worst one for them. This led to several wearing pads before they pick up high-end weight. It’s not necessarily inevitable that you’ll get tennis elbow, particularly if you invest in a good tennis elbow braces that will take the pressure off.
These can help prevent pain from getting worse and save you from major continued problems from it. Pain could only get worse and you don’t want to live a restricted life, right? Needless to say, tennis elbow braces are here for a reason. Use them, and thank us later.
It’s important to be clear that the tennis elbow braces we’ve included in our guide no not actually help relieve pain. They’re used in a preventative way. That is, to stop tennis elbow and the various symptoms that go along with it before it actually happens.
We have to be clear and explain that if you’re getting one with the view to reversing pain you’re already experiencing, it will not do the trick. It may alleviate the symptoms you have, but it won’t actually work like Tylenol or Aleve, which are actual proper painkillers.
Those are medications that relieve body aches and inflammation. It’s their entire job. Meanwhile, there are prescription painkillers that can eliminate issues further.
You wear them on the elbow just past the forearm to provide support to the tendons and muscles that your wrist and elbows use. They put a small amount of pressure on those tendons and muscles to stop them from becoming too tight.
They also help to release some of the tension on the tendons and muscles when they move.
There’s actually a professional term that explains how a brace works known as the ‘counterbalance brace’. It gets its name due to the force applied to the forearm working like a counterbalance against the tension generated naturally in these muscles when they move.
We did note that tennis elbow braces are not painkillers or pain relievers. That said, you may wonder if they actually work at all? We cannot blame you for the skepticism after what we mentioned earlier. In fact, we’d act very similar to the same thing came into play for us. However, they work very well. We’d like to explain this in more detail, however.
Commonly, there are three ways tennis elbow braces work for the everyday human being. We wanted to go over each in detail for you to make sure you knew how they all benefit you.
Injury prevention is possible from the way the tennis elbow brace supports you. It places pressure on the muscles it’s wrapped around and gives them additional support they wouldn’t have without it. This is considered to be ideal for helping to prevent repetitive injuries. This includes not just tennis elbow, but carpal tunnel syndrome too.
The reason it works so well is due in part to stopping problems to the areas of the elbow that are most at risk. They cannot develop any issue if they are unable to move from where they normally would be located. Your body is amazing and moves various ways to do several different things. Yet this is also a bad thing about it.
The reason is due to what we see here. Your elbow moves a certain way to do something, which is done by design by your body. The problem is that continuing this on the regular can cause these painful symptoms. Unless you begin to wear any of the great tennis elbow braces the moment you feel pain, you cannot prevent pain from never existing at all.
It may not remove pain, but it’s thought that tennis elbow braces could reduce pain by redirecting the stress of an injured area. Essentially, it stops it from getting worse. Basically meaning if you hurt every time you play tennis in your elbow, then tennis elbow braces will serve as an aide to reduce future pains.
Imagine breaking your arm and then trying to use it. Every day you never set it back in place and it’ll just heal wrong if it ever does at all. You’ll never make it better. Meanwhile, if you break your arm and go to a doctor to reset it along with getting a cast, you can ensure the proper healing takes place. You can even use that broken arm for certain things too.
That is basically the case with braces like this. They won’t immediately kill pain like painkillers will, of course. They’re more so about what you could develop. Putting proper tennis elbow braces on before activities will prevent pain, therefore, reduce the pain you might have had if you didn’t wear one.
When used properly, tennis elbow braces could help speed up the recovery time. As they trap heat in the muscles of the areas they come into contact with. Heat has been shown to help reduce the recovery time somewhat. It’s a nice thing to help soothe aches and pains for sure.
Do not assume that these braces will heal up anything that goes on in this part of the body. If you have a significant injury then you need to see a doctor about possible surgery and/or rehabilitation. These tennis elbow braces will be useful once you’re cleared to do the activities that may have caused your injury to begin with.
Due to being preventative to pains, they will keep injured areas from going out of where they need to be. Think of the cast we mentioned above. Clearly, you need to be active and get your arm back in movement again. Doctors and surgeons, as well as physical therapists, will rejoice if you do light stuff while wearing one. This could be immensely critical to recovery.
Tennis elbow braces are some of the most incredibly effective and preventative accessories to have. Well, that’s if they’re worn correctly. It’s always recommended that you consult a doctor or your general practitioner before using a tennis elbow brace.
However, we wanted to add an outline to teach you how to wear one properly.
Start by resting your elbow on a cushioned surface or pillow to help reduce the stress generated from application of the tennis elbow brace. Use your fingers to rub the lateral muscles in your elbow until you find the spot that feels the worst.
Measure roughly 10cm from that spot down your forearm using a tape measure or ruler. You’ll then place the brace component directly onto the measured spot. Now release the strap allowing it to hang from your arm. You should have the brace resting on the top of your forearm while the strap should be resting on the pinky finger or the outside of your arm.
Hold the brace firmly and wrap the Velcro strapping underneath your arm, fastening it on top of the brace section. It should be wrapped firmly around your arm while reinforcing lateral muscles, and not cutting off circulation. Then press your arm splint against the forearm.
Another note to be aware of is any that come with a wrist strap. If your brace has one, then wrap this smaller strap around wrist bone. You’ll do it just like you did with the forearm strap. Check that the unit will stay put by moving your arm.
If you’re experiencing sudden paleness or tingling sensations throughout your arm, loosen off the straps to allow for more circulation. Sometimes, there is a thing as too tight.
Up first, we have the Simien Tennis Elbow Support. This product is actually a pack of two tennis elbow braces for an incredibly affordable price. This is a very versatile brace as it can fit most people and it can be used on both the right and left forearm. If it doesn’t, Simien have said they’ll give you back your money.
It works with a hook-and-loop strap and it is also guaranteed by Simien to not have a tourniquet effect or cut off your circulation.
Made from 35% nylon and 65% neoprene, it is really built to last. If the two straps weren’t enough themselves, you also get an E-Book and sweatband for absolutely free. The fact that this pack includes two separate and identical straps means you have one that you can keep in your tennis or gym bag, then another you can store elsewhere.
This is perfect for those days when you’re going from one place to another. Of course, it’s also helpful if you’re just really forgetful and might forget to pick one up. With this two pack, you’ll always have a spare.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
DashSport offers up their entry into the tennis elbow braces market with this premium-quality copper compression sleeve and elbow brace pairing. The sleeve is snug and offers a small measure of compression. Meanwhile, the elbow brace can be adjusted and provides the amount of support you need, whether that’s very strong or incredibly light.
Both components also have the benefit of being able to be used at the same time or separately on either the left or right arm.
As copper-nylon is used in the construction, it has anti-bacterial, odor-resistant, and anti-itch properties. It’s also a very high performing fabric that will keep you cool when it’s hot, and warm when it’s cold. With the flatlock seam stitching, you’ll find that there’s little to no skin irritation or chafing.
You can obviously use it for anything, not just playing tennis. Use it for things CrossFit, football, baseball, as the list truly is endless.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
If you’re looking for something with a cool name, look no further than the Venom Sports Fitness Elbow Strap Compression Brace. The gel compression pad provides useful and cushioned support. Meanwhile, there’s a double-reinforced strap that helps prevent it from slipping off, which can be fully adjusted to fit most sizes.
It has been made from durable and very high-quality materials that ensure it will last a long time, even with regular use.
If you’re looking to reduce the effects of tennis elbow or stop it happening at all, this is a great option. It also helps that it’s very discreet, so you could easily hide these tennis elbow braces under work clothes if necessary. This is perfect for those weekend courtside warriors that love to be active.
Of course, it also works well if you have a work-life balance that includes lots of sporting activities and lots of office-based working. Multifunctional, the tennis elbow braces are.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
With these tennis elbow braces from Bodyprox, you can help alleviate the fatigue and stress caused to your forearm. All the while, it helps your tender tendons you damaged while smashing your backhand slice. Breathable and durable, both incredibly sought after in products like this, the Bodyprox product lives up to.
It can be fully adjusted and has Velcro strapping that makes it easy to secure.
At just 2.88ounces, it’s not exactly heavy, so it won’t give you too much weight to carry around. This could be important if you are still competing and taking part in sports. Furthermore, if you arrive at work you’re suffering from tennis elbow, this will at least help protect you from doing further damage to your injured tendons.
All in all, these tennis elbow braces are a nice addition to your tennis or gym bag. As mentioned, they’re even cool for the office.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The Kunto Elbow Brace Compression Support Sleeve has a four-way compression weave that ensures you get the most support possible, without losing mobility. This is perfect if you have regular meetups and games to take part in. No-one wants to avoid those if necessary.
However, it’s also a great help if your work involves a lot of keyboard and mouse use.
The company has taken measures to ensure you won’t experience any brace rolling. That is a bit of a pet peeve many guys have with this kind of accessory. We know ourselves from times we’ve worn similar implements just how frustrating and distracting it can be if you constantly have to readjust your strap every five minutes.
With these tennis elbow braces by Kunto, you don’t have to worry about that problem. We also love that this product has the look and feel of a top-performance, great quality brace. We liked the patterns on it because it won’t look ridiculous if you’re trying to take serves in it.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The PowerLix Elbow Brace Compression Support is tremendous. This is a very high-quality product that features an anti-slip system and amazing design. Wearing this, you’ll benefit from the four-way compression sleeve that has been ergonomically designed.
You’ll have a full range of protection and motion in your arm with this. Plus, the soft material makes it comfortable to wear for as long as you need.
As the company does not believe in a one-size-fits-all approach, you need to be careful you choose the right size for you. Consider your regular arm and possible swelling you have now or might have. Do this by taking the circumference of your elbow.
It’s worth noting that the sizes supplied are the averages for compression pressure. Every sleeve can actually be expanded by 60% for a better fit. Although it won’t perfectly fit absolutely everyone, it does have a level of versatility when it comes to sizing.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
If there’s one thing we think Copper Compression are trying to tell us it’s that their sleeve contains a high amount of copper. That said, be careful if you’re allergic to the stuff as genuine copper is in this and not just the color of it.
It’ll help to keep your muscles and joints warm throughout the day and night. It does this by using a comfortable fabric that allows you to move more freely while providing necessary support.
Not only has it been designed to be anti-slip, but it has also been constructed to be versatile. It’s subtle enough that it can be worn just about anywhere as well. This makes it a perfect choice if you’re looking to put more hours in at the gym, on the court, or just have work to get down to.
We know that it’s important to rest up when you’re injured. However, having one of these tennis elbow braces could help you stay active while protecting yourself from further injuries.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
From PlayActive, we have some a phenomenal tennis elbow brace to go over. These tennis elbow braces are a great deal because for under $20 you can actually get two high-quality elbow braces. Made from a combination of 35% nylon and 65% neoprene, these are designed to comfortably stay in place and last a long time.
Neoprene is obviously very popular nowadays, and with good reason. It works well!
Each brace has two straps, allowing them to be incredibly easy to adjust and provide just the right amount of support and pressure. The compression pad inside each brace is firm enough that it provides the support you need. Meanwhile, it’s soft enough that it will feel comfortable even when worn for long periods of time.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The KYUSport adjustable neoprene tennis strap is a very lightweight and adjustable accessory to invest in. It does the job it was designed for, and it’s very comfortable to wear. The model provides just the right amount of pressure and compression, that it doesn’t prevent you from having a full range of movement.
Rather, it stops you from damaging your elbow further.
You can wear it both day and night. If you’re out with the guys at the weekend, trying to play through the pain like a trooper/idiot or sitting at your desk, it fits your situation. Time is money and money is also another commodity you need to try and get one over your biggest tennis rival sometimes.
That makes many believe this item is overpriced or something. Yet that is not the case, as it’s reasonably priced for what it provided. The neoprene fabric and adjustable strapping make sure it is always comfortable and not too tight. This makes it well worth the buy if you’re asking us.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The tennis elbow brace and compression sleeve from WIMI Sports & Fitness contain a copper-infused nylon and spandex design. The brace provides you with an adjustable form of support and a comfortably large gel pad. On top of this, the sleeve and copper content can encourage oxygen delivery and blood flow.
These are two things that are beneficial when you are experiencing pain, or even before you do, and need to protect your arm and elbow. The material is also odor-resistant and anti-bacterial.
One of the best things about this is that you can use both the brace and sleeve together or separately. This is all depending on what you need. In addition to the sleeve and, brace you also receive an excellent E-book. Even if you don’t spend any time looking through it, this is ultimately a very good bargain.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
Two of the most important things, we feel, when buying tennis elbow braces is for it to be comfortable to wear and easy to use. After all, you don’t really want to deal with something that has too complicated a design when you’re just looking for that balance between support and movement.
The E-Fit Shop brace offers both these qualities. You simply slide the brace on and then use the two straps to adjust it to fit comfortably.
Once it’s on your arm, you’ll still find that you are able to perform a full range of motions. E-Fit has even looked at reducing the bulk of this brace so that it’ll fit nicely underneath whatever you wear.
This is perfect for when you want to go out for a spot to eat. Yet you want to give your elbow some support after you’ve just gone through a blazing match of five grueling sets.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The Bracoo Tennis Elbow strap has a very slick and compact design compared to some of the others on the market. It’s ergonomically designed for superior shock absorption and vibration dampening. It’s made from high-quality materials including cotton, spandex, nylon, and EVA.
The EVA pad helps support tense and stressed tendons and aides with their recovery. There’s no point in saying that it works as a painkiller, however. Although it will help relieve the issues, it won’t get rid of the pain. Be aware of this.
Strong-gripping Velcro fasteners are included to increase the durability and fit, ensuring that this counterbalance brace won’t slip out of place while you are wearing it. Easy to use and wear, it comes with anti-perspiration properties too.
This truly is a great and affordable brace that’ll give you the support you really need when you need it. The fact that it’s listed in this guide suggests it’s a pretty good deal already, however.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The Mueller Adjustable Elbow support ensures to users that their tennis elbow braces are easy to put on, and won’t be a struggle to use. The slip-on design is likely the main reason for this, as it allows for the ease of putting it on to exist. This also helps it become easier to adjust, even with just using one hand.
There are also adjustable straps that help you to find that sweet spot for a comfortable fit.
On top of this, it’s made from special HydraMesh fabric. This special fabric helps manage moisture and improves the level of comfort and breathability you can get all in the areas that need it the most. These tennis elbow pads come with a clever Microbe Shield as well.
This helps to control or eliminate product deterioration, stains, and odors that result from the growth of microorganisms and bacteria. That means no more sweaty and smelly arms, even when they have to be strapped up.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
Everyone likes a bargain, don’t they? This WITKEEN 2-Pack Tennis Elbow Brace may have a higher price tag than some in this guide, but you must consider what you get with it. Two tennis elbow braces come into play, which you can share with a partner or friend.
In addition to the effective elbow brace, you also get the silicone 40lbs hand gripper. Although not really necessary, it’s still a nice touch and helps you to work on your tendons and muscles. Ultimately, it helps to strengthen them and help make tennis elbow less likely.
These tennis elbow braces have an intuitive and comfortable design that consists of two parts. That’s the gel compression pad and the Velcro strapping system. This particular strap stands out because it’s made using 20% nylon and 80% neoprene. This is a bit higher than some of the others in this guide.
It has been designed to fit most arm sizes, as long as the circumference is less than 14 inches.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
McDavid is one of the country’s leading manufacturers of sports performance apparel and sports medicine braces. Made from 100% latex-free neoprene, it provides support for your soft and delicate tissues. It’s also effective with compression and thermal therapy.
The fully-patented HexPad Technology from McDavid provides lightweight padding with breathability and durability.
It benefits from having a flat-seam construction that offers a comfortable, contouring fit. The padding consists of dual-Sorbothane to provide the right amount of support to ease pain and prevent further pain in the future. We think this is an awesome addition to your tennis or gym bag.
Heck, you could even use it when playing golf, as it’ll protect your arms just the same. It also looks kinda badass too.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
AZSport seems to be one of the best at manufacturing tennis elbow braces around. This model can adjust easily by using the Velcro to provide the right amount of pressure you need, where you need it most. It’s made from very breathable material that helps with perspiration management and offers odor resistance.
Similar to others on our list, it also provides a sufficient amount of coolness to your elbow.
This can be used virtually anywhere and manages to offer a very compact and slim design. This allows it to be worn under clothing discreetly. Although the brand may not be quite as popular as others, getting adequate support for your arm while you hit those free winners for under $10 sounds good to us.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
Bracoo seems to be great with their tennis elbow braces, among other products. This particular Bracoo brace is just under $10, making it quite a steal. It’s a lot bulkier and more supportive than the other strap we listed by the company. It has a relatively simple, but extremely effective system.
As we’ve discussed at various points in the guide, this is important. This is particularly true if you have to put it on and take it off without a glamorous assistant to help you.
It’s made from that cool skin-friendly stuff that everything seems to be making use of these days, neoprene. We do rate that highly here at Men’s Gear. It offers adjustable support, thanks to the Velcro straps that can be attached across any point along the outside of the surface.
The support is assisted by the excellent range of motion if offers, allowing users to function like a normal human. Don’t worry, it works even for you abnormal humans too.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
Whoever said tennis was a sport for fancy types to play between their cups of tea, has had their head under a rock. Since the sport started to implement more intricate muscle training, it has become much faster and tougher. The price you pay for participation can be nothing short of bone-breaking.
Tennis elbow is not something that any of us enjoy. No one wakes up wanting that, for sure.
Normal, and reasonably normal people, however, like to protect themselves from nasty injuries and nagging pains. That’s why you came to this guide in the first place, right?
That’s why we put together the guide and the reviews. We wanted to provide you with a suitable guide to all you need to know about tennis elbow braces and support bands. We feel we have smashed that ace in here.
Despite some companies claims to pain relief, tennis elbow braces are there for support. They won’t take the pain away like a hit from a great painkiller. However, by redirecting the pain and easing the inflammation and pressure on the muscles and tendons affected, it can reduce discomfort and help with the healing.
We choose 17 tennis elbow braces to give you a wide variety of choice. Sizes and preferences are numerous, but we feel we have something for everyone in the guide. We know with the choices above you’ll be able to protect yourself from tennis elbow. Now get out there and stay active, but be sure to take one these tennis elbow braces with you.
You’ll thank us later!
F
or us men, our chair is like a throne. May it be your favored seat for watching the game at home, or that expensive gaming chair you just had to have – it definitely improves our performance – chairs are important. So, it’s little wonder that when it comes to choosing the perfect camping chair, we can be a little picky.
After all, the last thing you want is to go on a hike or trip with your mates and find you have a cheap, nasty chair that’s liable to collapse, making you a laughing stock for years to come. Becoming that fabled story from the past is definitely the last thing you want – especially when it gets relayed to potential girlfriends to embarrass you.
Instead, you’ll want your chair to be the envy of your friends. Which is why you’ll need a chair that’s ultra-comfortable and armed with the best features and gadgets.
Of course, choosing the right camping chair for your needs can be pretty tricky, especially when there’s so many options on the market. Which is why we’ve put together a list of 21 of the best camping chairs out there. No matter what you’re looking for from your portable chair, we have the perfect option for you.
Choosing the best camping chair for you is totally dependent on both you and what you’d like from your camping chair.
One of the most important factors when choosing a portable chair is what you intend to use it for. For instance, if you plan to take your chair on intensive hiking trips, you’re going to want a chair that is as lightweight as possible. Or, on the other hand, if you’re taller or bigger, you’ll want to look for portable chairs that have a higher weight capacity and are made from a stronger material.
Comfort should also be a major factor when considering camping chairs, especially if you plan to sit in your chair for long periods of time. Here you should look at the materials the chair is made from as well as whether it has any added extras such as drink holders or padded seating.
You’ll also want to set yourself a budget, as it can be very easy to go a little crazy buying the fanciest chair on the market. However, it would be silly to spend too much money on a chair when you could have bought one – with all the features you needed – for half that price.
Ultimately, choosing your perfect camping chair is more than just nipping into the shop and picking the first one you see.
One of the best things about camping chairs is their versatility. True, they might be called camping chairs, but these chairs have a host of uses. Here are just some of the most popular places people can take their chairs:
Beach – a trip to the beach is, for most of us, one of our favorite places to go. There is one slight downside to the beach though – sand! When you sit on it, even with a towel, it seems to get everywhere, and we mean EVERYWHERE. Taking a camping chair means you get all the benefits of the beach and none of the sandy bits.
Hiking – when you’ve made it up a humongous hill or massive mountain, you’re going to want to enjoy the view. By bringing your own portable chair, you can kick back and enjoy the scenery with your favorite beverage.
Tailgating – tailgating before a big game is a long-held tradition. You get to meet other fans, eat some tasty food and, with a nice camping chair, you can sit back and relax. After all, the game probably isn’t going to be relaxing!
Concerts – outdoor concerts and festivals can be exhausting on your feet, by taking a little folding chair in your backpack, you can sit back and be the envy of those around you. This saves you from trying to sit on cold, dirty floors that cause you more back pain than standing would have.
Family Events – many of us host big family parties outside. It might be for Independence Day, the Super Bowl or just a big family BBQ, either way, it’s likely that you’re going to need extra seating. If everyone brought their own camping chair, seating wouldn’t be a problem.
School Games – If you have kids, it’s highly likely that they’re going to end up playing some sports, which can sound wonderful on paper. In reality, though, long hours of practice in all weathers can be pretty exhausting and painful if you’re stuck standing. You can make these events easier by bringing your own comfy chair, then you can concentrate on cheering.
When choosing a folding chair, it’s important that you choose one with quality materials.
Firstly, you’ll want a decent metal frame. Here steel makes for a stronger frame but is heavier, while aluminum is much lighter but isn’t as strong as steel. You’ll need to decide what’s better for what you’re going to use it for.
Fabric-wise, polyester and textilene are both strong and easy to clean, which is pretty important when using your chair in all weathers and terrains. If you plan to use your chair in particularly warm climates, opting for a meshed material makes for a sensible choice, as this is breathable keeping you cooler. For cooler times, a padded chair will be both comfortable and cozy.
Rocking and camping chairs are those that are best suited for a night in front of the campfire enjoying beers, s’mores and, hopefully, no ghost stories that keep you up all night. These tend to be the most comfortable of those on the market as many have padding for chilly nights.
In particular, rocking chairs tend to be incredibly comfortable as you can lean back and rock yourself, just like a regular rocking chair. These can be very relaxing and are perfect for a family gathering.
As you’re taking these chairs camping, you’ll most likely be taking these chairs via transport, so, you can afford to opt for a heavier chair that’s a little sturdier.
If you plan on taking your chair with you on hikes or mountain climbing, you’re going to want a chair that is as lightweight and portable as possible. Otherwise your chair will be cumbersome and you’ll want to chuck it over the mountain, never to be seen again.
Ideally, you’ll want a chair to be under 10lbs and one that folds into a small bundle that can be put into a backpack. This will make for a chair that is easy to transport and won’t cause you issues whilst climbing. Some of us like to train using heavy backpacks to improve fitness, in these cases you may want a heavier chair.
Oversized camping chairs are those especially made for those with a taller or larger frame, which a regular camping chair might not support.
These chairs tend to be made from steel, which is a sturdier metal, and be a heavier, less portable chair – although it is possible to get lightweight and oversized chairs.
As well as having higher weight capacities, oversized chairs tend to have longer backs that are better suited to taller people. They also have wider seats, providing more room and comfort for those sitting in them.
Chairs that come with an added canopy are particularly suited for those who’d like to use their chairs in the sun, as the canopy will help protect you from harmful sun rays. This can be particularly good if you’d like to take your chair to the beach.
A canopy chair has its uses everywhere, though. On a sunny day, camping, tailgating or chilling at a concert can all call for a chair that hides you from the sun. These chairs are useful if you like to read or use your gadgets in the sun too, as the canopy hides you from the glare.
Like canopy chairs, a camping chair with a footrest is like a handy gadget for your chair. Adding extra comfort, it’s perfect for those of you that love to put your feet up and relax.
These footrests are often detachable, which makes for versatile chairs, especially on camping trips as you’ll be able to use your chair like a recliner and remove the footrest to use like a normal camping chair.
Folding camping chairs are wonderful gadgets, but one real annoyance is the fact that, when we’re not using them, they can be annoying to lug around under your arm. Which is what makes the ALPS King Kong offering so wonderful – every chair comes with its own shoulder carry bag. This means that when you’re not using your chair, you can simply stick it in its bag and fling it over your shoulder.
Then there’s the fact that this chair can hold some serious weight. As strong as the real King Kong – of course he’s real! – this chair can take an impressive 800 lbs of weight. Which, even if you’re nowhere near the capacity – makes for an incredibly sturdy chair that is also extremely comfortable.
Unlike many other camping chairs on the market, the King Kong is also very spacious, especially on the armrests. This spaciousness makes the King Kong feel more like a coveted lounge chair in your home, so you know it will add a touch of luxury to any camping trip.
Indeed, ALPS hold so much esteem in the comfort and durability of their chair, that every product comes with a lifetime guarantee.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
When it comes to a classic folding camping chair, this Caravan Sports offering ticks all the boxes. Not only does it have all the comfort of a deck chair, it has the added bonus of being portable.
Made from durable textilene fabric, which is easy to clean – particularly useful for rogue mustard drops while tailgating before the big game – the chair also benefits from a double bungee system. This allows you to sink into a natural position in the chair, where the fabric hugs your spine, stopping back pain and giving lumbar support.
Most importantly, these folding camping chairs are free from those painful bars across the front, that tend to dig into the backs of your legs while you sit. This means that you can sit comfortably in these chairs for hours on end, making them especially good for a fishing trip or beach visit.
The chair can be quite awkward to carry, and at 11.8 lbs it isn’t the most lightweight chair on our list. However, these chairs fold very flat, meaning they won’t take up much room in your trunk. So, if you plan to use your chair a short trip from your vehicle, this slight niggle won’t be an issue.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The idea of zero gravity might conjure up images of floating in space, but when it comes to your lounge chair it means one thing – comfort that is out of this world! You simply push back and you’ll find yourself floating on comfortable textilene fabric. The bungee system makes for a very comfortable experience, kind of like lying on a hammock, just without the fear of falling out.
Best suited for your patio or for a day at the beach, these zero gravity chairs fold nicely for storage and travel. It is a tad heavy to carry at 15 lbs, so you wouldn’t want to take it for a hike or anywhere far from your car or truck.
The chair also comes with some handy extras, including a drinks tray and a removable pillow. Just think, on a hot day, you’ll be able to lie back, relax and sip an ice-cold beer in your own little paradise.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The problem with even the best camping chairs is, although they’re strong and hard-wearing, we tend to need to add some cushioning for extra comfort. Which not only takes up a lot of room on your chair, it also doesn’t look the manliest to need a cushion.
Fortunately, CORE know that our derrières occasionally need that extra cushioning and have added an in-built padded cushion to their folding chairs. Incredibly comfortable, this padded layer makes even the longest of family BBQs bearable. Just remember to take your chair with you to the bathroom, otherwise you might lose it to a sneaky chair thief.
As well as being built for comfort, this chair comes equipped with hard steel arms. Unlike those flimsy offerings that some folding camping chairs have, these harder arms give extra support when getting out of your chair, which is especially useful for those with back problems. So, you may even consider getting a matching chair for an ageing relative, too!
For those who like their gadgets nearby, the chair has its own built-in pocket for storing phones and tablets. There’s even a collapsible cup holder for holding your favorite beverage.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
Some days, you need more than just a cup holder from your folding chair. Where do you put all those tasty snacks while tailgating or enjoying a picnic with the family? Well, that’s when the Stylish Camping Director Chair comes in with its own Hail Mary, it has its own folding table!
Never again will you struggle while juggling snacks, you can just stack them up on the table instead. There’s even a little pocket to hide all your gadgets in and a solid cup holder for your drink.
Plus, this lightweight camping chair is extremely easy to get around. The aluminum makes for a far lighter frame than other steel models, so it can be easily folded and taken to any game. It’s still a little awkward to carry, though, so don’t bank on taking it up any mountains. For a trip to the beach or a day fishing, it’s more than ideal.
One slight issue, although the aluminum is strong, it’s not as strong as steel. So, if you’re tall or larger, you may be better suited to an oversized camping chair.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
If you’re after a lightweight camping chair, then the Trekology YIZI Go Portable should be at the top of your list. Not only is this folding chair a featherweight contender at just 2.4 lbs, but it’s also small enough to fold away into a backpack or even taken as a carry-on for a flight.
This can be particularly useful for concerts or outdoor events, as it’s light and easy to carry. Never again will you need to struggle on to a cold stadium floor waiting for a band to get on stage. Instead be the envy of everyone around you, sitting comfortably in your foldaway chair.
Best suited for a camping trip or a long hike, the Go Portable is idiot-proof to set up. It’s simply a case of taking it out its useful little carry bag and connecting the seat cloth to the frame. You’ll even be able to assemble after a few beverages – it really is that easy!
If you plan on taking your chair to the beach, there’s a special sand cover that’s sold separately. This will prevent the chair from slipping into the sand, giving a more stable and comfortable base.
One major plus-point for these chairs is the fact it allows for adjustable heights. This means if you’re very tall and your other half is much shorter, it can still be suitable for you both. Simply choose the height setting – it allows for heights of 13, 14 or 15 inches – that suits you most.
A slight word of warning, though. True, this chair claims to be suitable for a weight capacity of up to 300lbs. However, some reviews suggest that higher weights struggle with the chair’s aluminum frame, which can’t withstand those over 250 lbs, which is something to keep in mind.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
When you plan on going camping or for an intensive weekend hike, the last thing you want to do is lug around a heavy chair. Yet, there’s nothing quite like having a seat on the edge of a mountain and soaking in the view with a well-earned beer. It becomes quite the quandary!
With the Helinox Chair One, though, you never need to compromise. This wonderful little chair folds away to a size suitable for any backpack. Even better, it weighs less than 2 lbs, so you’ll hardly notice it in your bag – even on the most intensive of hikes.
What’s the catch, then? Well, surprisingly, there really isn’t one. The chair is easy to carry (it even has its own carry bag), is easy to put together and even easy to clean. Even if your hike is marred by torrential rain and chilling winds, your chair will still pop into place easily – even if you’re not altogether keen to have a seat in the middle of said weather.
The frame itself is made from DAC aluminum; this company make some of the strongest and well-made tent poles in the industry. So, as lightweight and delicate as this chair might look, it’s actually as strong as an ox, holding weights of up to 320 lbs.
Of course, this chair isn’t exclusive to hikes or for camping. The fact it’s so light and folds into a small carry case makes it into a very versatile folding chair. It would be ideal for concerts, family events, tailgating and the beach.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The problem with some folding camping chairs is, although they might be light and easy to carry, on a hot day they do nothing to cool you down. Often leaving you with those undesirable sweat patches on your back.
Thankfully, the KingCamp folding chair is armed with a mesh fabric that is both breathable and moisture-wicking. This means, that even on the stickiest of days, you’ll feel cool and comfortable in your chair. Something that is sure to have your neighboring sitters jealous.
As well as the useful mesh backing, this chair also has a side table with drinks holder. A brilliant addition for keeping your snacks and drinks, which makes this chair especially good for tailgating or for summer BBQ while camping.
The chair itself doesn’t fold away as compactedly as others on this list, but that shouldn’t put you off. True, it might not be the best choice for a hike and most concert venues won’t allow it through the doors. For a camping trip or beach day – even just for sitting in the garden – the KingCamp makes for a grand choice. It even has an in-built handle when folding to make for easier transport and the frame doesn’t sink into soil or sand.
Easily assembled, the chair has foam armrests, which are firm and comfortable when sitting on the chair for long periods of time. These are also easy to clean, perfect for stray drips of ketchup and mustard.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
We tend to associate rocking chairs with memories of our granny knitting on the porch, but there’s something about rocking back and forth on a chair that is incredibly relaxing. Especially to calm your nerves before that crucial playoff match!
The GCI Outdoor rocking camping chairs have their own spring-action rocking technology, making this more than just a chair – it’s actually a piece of scientific gadgetry! A lot of portable rocking chairs can feel too rocky, and no we don’t mean it likes to punch meat and run up stairs spectacularly. We’re talking about chairs that move too much and too easily, making for an overall uncomfortable experience.
With this chair, you’ll not only have a pleasant rocking experience, but the chair also feels like a traditional, sturdy camping chair. This means you get the best of both worlds. Plus, comfort is key here, with padded armrests that make long periods of sitting far more comfortable than they would on other chairs.
Easy to unfold and put away, this rocking camping chair has a useful drinks holder included too. Folding away flat, it will easily fit into your car or caravan. Keep in mind, though, this chair weighs around 12 lbs to carry so it’s far from light. This means you’ll want to avoid using this chair for any trip or event that involves a long walk, unless you’re feeling particularly strong.
The extra-weight comes with other advantages, though, as this is an extremely sturdy chair with its steel frame. The rocking feature will even work in softer terrains such as soil or sand, rather than just working on concrete.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
Versatility is important when looking for a portable chair and if you’re looking for a rocking chair that has all the advantages of a regular camping chair, the ALPS Rocker Chair could be ideal for you.
Strong and sturdy, this chair has a powder-coated steel frame that will last for years. This strong frame means that the ALPS Rocker comes with a 300 lbs weight limit, so it can handle more weight than others on this list.
It also travels well, folding into a compact size. You’ll get a useful shoulder bag with your chair, that it can be folded into and taken with you on hikes or camping trips. However, as compact as it looks, this chair still comes with a 11 lbs carry weight, so if you’re planning an intensive day out, you’ll probably want to avoid the extra burden.
For a short journey from the car, though, this low rocker chair makes for a very comfortable sitting experience. The TechMesh fabric is very breathable, so on a very hot day you’ll benefit from the chair keeping cool. Plus, you really can’t beat that rocking motion for a relaxing seat, especially in front of an open fire on a camping trip.
The chair itself has a locking mechanism, which makes for a safer rocking experience. This will bring peace of mind for those of you that have kids. Or, if you’ve had too many tipples after the game, you won’t need to worry about falling over and your friends posting the video on Twitter.
One small negative, this is a low standing rocker tray, which will be an advantage to some. However, if you’re very tall or you find getting in and out of chairs difficult, you may want to look at other portable camping chairs on this list.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
This Timber Ridge rocking chair may be one of the heaviest chairs on this list at 16.5 lbs – meaning it’s not the most portable – however, it’s still worthy of a mention due to its other advantages.
For one, this chair has a very high back, akin to a traditional wooden rocking chair. This not only makes the chair very comfortable to sit in, but it’s also great for those with back problems or the taller amongst us. Never again will you feel like you’re sitting in a child’s seat.
The chair comes fully assembled too, so there’s no need to wrangle with any tools or complicated instructions. All you need to do is unpack and unfold! There’s even a locking mechanism when the chair is folded, so you needn’t worry about the chair unfolding and causing any injury. The chair also comes with a year’s manufacturer warranty against defects, so you get peace of mind.
So where would you use it? Well, it’s not going to be hike-friendly, nor would you be able to slip it into a stadium concert, but there’s many useful ways you can use this rocking chair.
Camping or tailgating are particularly good events for this chair, as it will easily fit into your car or truck. Then, simply, pull it out and enjoy the immense comfort and jealous looks from others who haven’t got as fancy chair as you.
There’s even a little storage bag attached to the side, where you can store your gadgets and snacks.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
Like the Timber Ridge offering before, this Timber Ridge XL recliner is another heavyweight, and this one is even heavier at 24.2 lbs. Yet, like before, this isn’t off-putting when you’re using this oversized camping chair in the right situation.
Perhaps the best camping chair in this list for the taller amongst us, portable chairs can often feel flimsy. The Timber Ridge XL recliner, though, feels incredibly safe and sturdy to sit on, and has an impressive 350 lbs weight limit due to its strong steel frame.
As well as a large weight capacity, this recliner is also a decent width at 21.3 inches, which provides extra room and comfort to users. This can be especially useful for a chilly night’s camping where you want to wrap up warm in a blanket or sleeping bag – you won’t feel like you’re getting squished into a tin can like a sardine. Even the cup holder is extra-large for your drinks!
The frame itself reaches 72-inches when fully reclined which, again, is a plus-point for taller users. The zero-gravity feature provides comfort as well as being ergonomic, perfect for those with back problems. This comfort is furthered with a bungee suspension system that removes pressure from your spine while sitting and a removable pillow that can either be used as lumbar support or as a headrest.
When reclining, you can choose your position and then lock it in using the chair’s locking system. This prevents the chair moving unnecessarily when reaching for a drink or adjusting your position, which can be annoying on other recliners.
Unlike other folding chairs that have plastic armrests, this recliner has armrests from natural wood. These are not only friendlier to the environment, but are also far more aesthetically pleasing to the eye, providing a luxury finish to this recliner. Indeed, everything about this chair feels luxurious.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
Although other portable chairs on this list have a high weight capacity of 300-350 lbs, for some of us that’s just not enough and we need more. Which is where the Guide Gear Oversized Camping Chair steps up to the mark with its impressive 500 lbs capacity.
Even better, this isn’t the kind of chair that claims to take a high weight capacity but, in reality, you’d be terrified to sit on. This chair has an incredibly sturdy steel frame with an intricate leg design that makes it even stronger. Plus, the extra-wide seat makes it just as comfortable as there’s plenty of room, with its high weight capacity it could even be used as a cuddle chair in front the campfire.
Convenient as it is strong, the chair has its own mesh pocket for storing your gadgets or snacks and a large drink holder.
One downside with oversized chairs is that they tend to be heavy and bulky, making them far less portable than other chairs. With this Guide Gear offering though, this is far from the case. This chair only weighs 13.1 lbs, so it isn’t too hard to carry around.
True, you probably wouldn’t take it up a mountain, but for camping, tailgating or a day at the beach, this chair is easy to transport. It even has a mesh fabric, meaning it will be breathable and comfortable on a hot, humid day. Indeed, this chair is so comfortable, you’ll feel like you’re sitting in your favorite chair at home – you might even want to use this at home too!
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
When you’re using your portable chair for a long time – such as a day at the beach or a long camping trip – it can become uncomfortable after a while. Not because the chair is particularly uncomfortable, but because with limited room, you tend to get that awful numbness.
Which is why this Caravan Canopy oversized camping chair is such a good investment. It has everything you’d expect from a portable chair, just with extra room to move around get yourself comfy with its 20.5-inch seat.
The size doesn’t compromise on portability, though, the chair is around 14 lbs to carry. True, this is a little heavy, but it’s far lighter than other oversized chairs on this list. So, for a short trip from your car or truck, this chair is easy to carry and use. When not in use, the chair easily folds flat for storage, so it won’t take up too much room.
Perfect for both the taller and the shorter of us, this chair is easy to get in and out of, something that can be harder with recliner chairs. Making it wonderful for everyone in the family.
Comfort-wise, the Caravan Canopy Sports chair benefits from a double bungee system, so you’ll sink into this chair with plenty of spinal support. Just don’t let any of your mates borrow it – you’ll never get the chair back!
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
When it comes to finding a recliner when you’re tall, it’s no easy feat. More often than not, you’re left with a chair that has your feet dangling uncomfortably off the end. Which is where the PORTAL XL recliner comes in. Not only is this recliner oversized, taking weights of up to 350 lbs, the reclined length of 71 inches means there’s plenty of room for the tall.
The zero-gravity system has a locking mechanism, meaning you can lock any position – from 0 to 170 degrees – into place. So, you won’t feel like you’re bobbing about when you shift yourself. Plus, the bungee system on the fabric with give you plenty of support, particularly important if you plan to spend all day in your chair.
The adjustable headrest adds to the comfort and can be moved to suit your height. In fact, you might just be making this your new favorite napping chair.
If you do plan on using your recliner for sunbathing, the chair has a mesh back making it breathable on hot days. So, you won’t feel like your cooking in your chair. The handy attached table is ideal for keeping your snacks, and the cup holder will hold your beer. You’ll think you’ve escaped away to a paradise island, rather than being in your backyard.
It’s not just sunbathing that this chair is perfect for, though. With its easy-to-assemble nature and flat storage, this recliner is easy to carry in your car or truck making it a wonderful addition to your camping trip. Just don’t try to carry it too far, as at 27.5 lbs, this is a hefty chair to carry.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
When you’re planning a trip, may it be a day at the beach, camping, tailgating or even watching your kid’s game from the sidelines – having a chair makes all the difference. The problem comes, though, when on a particularly hot day you can feel like you’re cooking away under the sun.
Which is when camping chairs with canopy addons become such a wonderful investment. Not only will you get comfort, but the added canopy hides you from the sun creating your own little paradise.
The SwimWays Kelsyus has its own patented sun canopy, this impressive feature shades you from the sun glare making it easier for you to see and avoid any glare. Even better, this canopy has an impressive 50 UPF sun protection, so even if you miss a few bits with your sunscreen, this chair will help keep you from getting burnt.
Fully portable, the chair weighs just over 11 lbs when it’s folded, so it’s light enough to take down the beach or into a summer concert. One of the coolest features of this chair is that, when folded, the sun canopy transforms into a carry case for the chair. Which means you’ll never lose your bag, or have it blow away in the wind so you need to chase it. This is secured with a snap-lock and a shoulder strap, so carrying your chair is simple.
As well as sun protection, the SwimWays Kelsyus comes with a host of other features. Most notably, the chair itself has a large seat for extra comfort. This comes with a rounded front, which adds an extra level of comfort when sitting.
If you’re using your seat for tailgating or similar, the large cup holder will hold one, if not two, ice-cold beers. There’s even an O-ring, a feature that adds extra stability – especially good if you like to jump out of your chair screaming when your kid scores a touchdown at practice.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
While the SwimWays Kelsyus has a wonderful sun canopy, there was slight disadvantage to what is otherwise a fantastic folding chair – the sun canopy couldn’t be adjusted so you wouldn’t always be shaded from the sun. Something which isn’t the case the Quik Shade Max chair.
This camping chair comes with a canopy that can be both raised and lowered, as well as tilted. This means that no matter where the sun is, you’ll be able to adjust your canopy to protect your face and eyes from the sun.
This chair is heavy-duty enough to be used in all weathers – not just on sunny days. The fabric is made from 600D polyester fabric, which is stain resistant and easy to wipe clean. Even when subjected to lots of wet weather, this fabric is mildew and mold resistant, so you can use it even on the wettest and wildest of camping trips. This is also made with a mesh, which will be breathable on hot days, helping to keep you cool.
For gadget-lovers, the chair has its own mesh pouch, ideal for storing your phone or tablet. Dual cup holders mean you can keep multiple drinks on the go, whether that be water for keeping hydrated on a hot day, or that perfect beer to enjoy the game.
The chair comes with its own carry case, that your chair easily folds into. Disassembled, this chair only weighs 9 lbs so it’s light enough to be portable. One slight issue with the chair, though, is that its weight capacity is lower than others on this list at 225 lbs, so it may not be suitable for everyone.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
Sometimes you want to lie back on a lounger and enjoy the sun, just without the sun glaring down on your face. True, you can stick a hat over your face, but why do that when you can get your own lounger with a built-in sun canopy?
Completely created for comfort, these zero-gravity chairs give users a weightless experience as you lie back and enjoy the sun. This comfort is added to with the much sought-after double bungee system, which allows your body to sink into an extremely natural position in your chair, giving your spine support as well as comfort.
As well as a removable back pillow – which can be moved around for your own preference – these chairs have their own little table with drinks and phone holder. This is also detachable if you don’t wish to use it.
The canopy itself is UV-resistant, so it will protect your face from harmful rays. This canopy is ideal for those who like to read in the sun, as it will shade the sun from your eyes making it easier to read. This is also useful for using your gadgets out of the sun’s glare.
At 20.5 lbs to carry, this chair isn’t the most portable, however this isn’t a massive downside as it’s really most suited for use in your backyard as a lounger or for a seat during family events. It does fold well, so if you’re using transport it can easily be taken on holiday with you.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
Versatility is one of the biggest selling points when it comes to a portable chair, and this Kamp Rite chair comes with bags of it.
For one, the chair has its own detachable footrest, which is perfect for those of us who like to put their feet up. You’ll feel just like you’re on a reclining sofa at home, making it incredibly comfortable. Then, when you want to pull your chair up for dinner round the table, you just pull off the footrest and you have yourself a traditional camping chair.
Of course, this chair isn’t just for camping, which is why it’s such a versatile investment. With the footrest attached, you can easily use it in your garden to enjoy the sun. Even tailgating, it’s nice to lie back and enjoy your surroundings.
Being detachable, it means your chair can also be used as a regular folding chair. This means, you can take it friend’s BBQs, your kid’s big game and even to the beach. Again, on the beach, the detachable footrest will make for a brilliant sun lounger rather than lying on sand.
When folded, the chair goes neatly into its own carry bag for simple transportation.
At 11 lbs it’s probably a little too heavy for taking on a hike unless, of course, you’re working on those muscles. In which case it may be perfect!
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
For some, going on a massive hike up the side of a mountain is purely for those Instagram photos. For others, the best thing about making your way up a mountain is to put your feet up, open a beer and enjoy the view.
If you fall into the latter bracket, then you need this ALPS Mountaineering Escape chair in your life. True, it might be a little heavy at 10 lbs for some people to hike with, but when you consider how wonderful it will be to have a chair with a footrest to enjoy those spectacular views, you’ll be more than willing to shoulder the weight.
Incredibly sturdy, this chair has a strong powder-coated steel frame, that will stand strong on most terrains. The weight capacity isn’t as large as others at 225 lbs, but this is just a slight niggle in what is otherwise a very good make of chair. It will give great support to your body and, even on uneven ground, you’ll be able to lie back and feel like you’re on your sofa at home.
Particularly good for camping trips, the chair folds compactly into the bag it’s provided with. This can be easily transported with your other camping gear, and will be perfect for dozing in front of a roaring fire.
As well as the useful footrest, this ALPS Escape chair also has two cup holders for your convivence. Like the Kamp Rite, the footrest is detachable using the attached buckles, so it’s nice and versatile too. Just remove the footrest when you’d like to use it as a normal camping chair.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
If you’re looking for a foldable chair that’s both lightweight and the height of luxurious comfort, then you can’t get much better than this Camp Solutions offering. Not only does this chair have its own footrest so you can put your feet up while enjoying the outdoors, it even has a reclining headrest – perfect for stargazing!
Made from high-quality steel, this is a very sturdy chair with a higher weight capacity of 300 lbs, making it accessible for those bigger and taller men. The chair’s material is meshed, making it very breathable on those hot summer nights too, so you needn’t worry about any sweaty backs or your chair becoming a bit stinky.
As well as the reclining headrest and footstool, this chair also comes with a useful drink cup holder and a mesh pocket for keeping your gadgets and/or books in. There’s even a removable pillow for extra comfort during those forest naps.
Lightweight at just under 11 lbs, the chair folds up into a provided carry case making it easy to transport. As well as camping, it would be possible to take on hikes, as long as you could carry the weight.
One slight downside to this chair, as comfortable as it is, is that the footrest isn’t detachable like the others on this list. So, keep this in mind before buying. It’s pretty easy to put your legs either side to stand upright, though, so this is still a great buy. Especially when you consider just how comfortable this chair is.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
Now that you’ve studied all of our favorite chairs and decided what you’d like to use your chair for, it’s time to pick your favorite. It doesn’t matter if you’re looking for a camping chair, a lightweight hiking chair or a tailgating throne that will be the envy of all your mates – there is a wonderful chair for everyone on this list.
Choosing the right chair for you is no easy task, especially when each of them come with their own advantages and disadvantages. If you’re really struggling, write yourself a list of everything you’d use your chair for as well as what you’d like from a chair. Then it’s simply a case of matching your wish list to the chair that ticks the most boxes.
What you can be assured, though, is that each of the chairs featured on this list are high-quality, meaning they will last you for years into the future. Indeed, these chairs are so good, that if you fancied multiple chairs for different events, you could easily pick a few.
Just be careful when letting your friends or family borrow them, though. These chairs are all so comfortable that there’s every possibility that you’ll never see them again!
T
oday’s 13-inch and 15-inch MacBook Pros are a prime example of Apple engineering at its most elegant and sophisticated. Lucky owners of a recent MacBook Pro model enjoy exceptional processors, beautiful displays, and outstanding graphics – enough to game, watch movies and work, all whilst knowing that your MacBook Pro can keep up with you. The latest models seem like they have it all, but do they really? For some users, these models are lacking some very important additions… enough ports to get you through the day!
These days, the ports on a MacBook Pro are as streamlined as the design – which is not necessarily a good thing. Gone are the trusty HDMI ports, banished are the standard USB ports, and the slot for SD cards is shelved alongside all the other legacy ports… so what’s left? Well, the latest MacBook Pros aren’t without ports altogether, however, you really only have one major port to play with, the Thunderbolt 3 port, or the USB-C port. Luckily, all is not lost if you want to up your port-game, or just have better management over your ports and the associated wire-nightmare…
The answer to port problems with the MacBook Pro comes in the form of a MacBook Pro docking station, your one-stop device for managing your ports like a pro. MacBook Pro docking stations have been around for a while now, giving MacBook Pro owners the ability to keep their work stations free from common wire problems that can occur if you have multiple devices connected at once. The best MacBook Pro docking station will expand the port-limitations on your laptop, and these days, give you a lot more flexibility when using older devices with a recent MacBook Pro model.
As sleek as the MacBook Pro and incredibly practical, a MacBook Pro dock will give you the power to reclaim the ports you need, offer you the flexibility to connect your MacBook Pro to the devices you want, and promise that a more organized future is just around the corner. Intrigued to see if a new MacBook Pro docking station has the solution that you’ve been searching for to take your MacBook Pro to the next level? Keep reading to explore our picks for the top 10 best MacBook Pro docking station options on the market…
A MacBook Pro docking station may not be the first thing that you think about buying after picking up a new MacBook Pro, but you may be surprised at just how useful a docking station on your desk could be – or if you opt for a portable station, tucked in your laptop bag. A docking station addresses many of the common MacBook Pro-related problems, like the number and type of ports there are on the laptop, and how messy having a bunch of wires attached to your MacBook Pro can be.
Here are three of the main benefits of upping your port game by investing in a MacBook Pro docking station:
Saves Space – One of the biggest benefits working in favor of a MacBook Pro dock is the space-saving potential that it offers. While wires don’t naturally take up much space, when you have a lot of them running to and from your laptop, your desk can suddenly feel a lot more cramped than it actually is. Many types of MacBook Pro dock station are slim and compact, enabling you to make the most of additional ports, and neaten your wires without taking up much space.
Enables You to Connect Legacy Devices – If tech isn’t your first language, then you may be wondering just what a legacy port is. Well, a legacy port is a type of computer port that’s no longer considered to be ‘modern’, so new devices won’t have them included as standard. However, that doesn’t mean that they stop being needed overnight. If you still have devices that need a HDMI port or a USB-A port, then some MacBook Pro docking stations will enable you to use them with your laptop.
Improves Organization – If you work at a desk every day, then it can very quickly become filled with all the devices that you need on a daily basis – everything from microphones and headphones to keyboards may be vying for space. This is where a MacBook Pro docking station can really be a benefit. Having a docking station means that you can connect everything you need with ease, and for some stations, even boost your organization further by having a readily-available mobile charging point or dual monitor setup.
It’s safe to say that not all MacBook Pro dock stations are constructed equally, so you’ll find that whilst some stations offer you more ports than you know what to do with, others will keep things simple with just a handful of ports. What you’ll be able to connect to the docking stations will differ, but there are some common devices that you’ll find are compatible with a selection of new MacBook Pro dock stations. Some of these include:
Before choosing a new MacBook Pro docking station, it’s important to make sure that you’re choosing one that’ll allow you to plug in all the devices that you need, whether they require the latest ports or a legacy port. Some of the most common ports that you’ll find on MacBook Pro dock stations, include:
Depending on the model of MacBook Pro docking station, you may find that there are zero or multiple of each of the ports, or additional legacy ports. For example, some MacBook Pro docking stations will come with 5 USB 3.0 type-A ports, while some will come with none at all. Similarly, some docking stations will come with a built-in HDMI port, others will offer an adapter for DisplayPort to HDMI, whilst others will come with neither.
Having a dual monitor setup is immensely practical, whether you need your computer for work or for leisure. The good news is that a MacBook Pro docking station can be the answer that you’ve been looking for to create a dual monitor setup alongside your MacBook Pro. However, the bad news is that not every MacBook Pro docking station on the market is going to enable you to achieve such a feat. In contrast, some can let you build a triple monitor setup, so a dual monitor setup is definitely doable.
To create a dual monitor setup with a MacBook Pro docking station, you first need to identify which ports you’re going to need to be able to connect the dock to your monitors; as the MacBook Pro will be connected to the docking station, you won’t need to worry about dealing with any additional wires there. For modern MacBook Pro models (late 2016 onwards), one of the simplest ways to go about setting everything up is to have one monitor connected to a HDMI, DVI, VGA or DisplayPort, and one monitor connected via a Thunderbolt 3 port. HDMI ports are very common on monitors and TVs, so you’ll likely find that this is one of ports that you’ll most require for your dual monitor setup.
Investing in a MacBook Pro Thunderbolt 3 dock if your laptop has Thunderbolt 3 ports is going to be one of your best options for creating a dual monitor setup without having multiple wires trailing out of your MacBook Pro. Even if you don’t have a latest MacBook Pro model with Thunderbolt 3 ports, a docking station could still be your best bet for a well-designed dual monitor setup without a lot of fuss. There are many docking stations amongst our countdown of the top 10 best MacBook Pro dock stations that are dual monitor compatible, so you’re sure to find one that’s fit for purpose when designing your setup.
There’s no singular MacBook Pro dock station type, but there are a handful of common features that you can expect to find amongst many of the best MacBook Pro dock stations on the market in 2019. Here’s a selection of the main types of MacBook Pro dock stations that you’ll find included in our top 10 list:
While these features are very common amongst MacBook Pro docking stations, that doesn’t mean that there aren’t plenty of variations on the market. From the vertical Henge Dock MacBook Pro docking station to the bar LandingZone docking station, there are an abundance of types available for all models of MacBook Pro. To get a better look at some of the most unique docking stations on the market and some of the most popular types, it’s time to dive into our countdown of the top 10 MacBook Pro docking stations in 2019!
To start our list of the top 10 best MacBook Pro docking stations, we’re kicking things off with a high-tech product from well-known brand Plugable. The Plugable Thunderbolt 3 Docking Station is packed full of features despite how remarkably small the station is compared to many on the market. This docking station is small enough to work as a portable dock if you need to move your setup on a daily basis, is compatible with both Apple and Dell products, and is designed for single-monitor use.
This MacBook Pro USB C dock has a USB 3.0 type-C and USB 3.0 type-A port on the front to take care of your MacBook Pro connection, but the real magic is situated neatly on the back of the docking station. On the back of the dock there’s a 4k DisplayPort (with a HDMI adapter included), headphone jack, microphone jack, 1Gb Ethernet, USB-C port, USB 3.0 port and USB-C Gen 1 – which should take care of most port requirements, and then some.
If you’re looking to turn your desk into a powerhouse of possibilities and be able to move the setup from place to place without too much hassle, then this may be just the product that you’ve been searching for. This USB C dock for MacBook Pro will look great on your desk, but more importantly, it’ll give you a wide scope when you choose which peripherals you want to have connected to your MacBook Pro.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
Next up we have an incredibly compact MacBook Pro docking station from Lenovo. There’s a good chance that you’re already familiar with this two-time winner of the best laptop brand award – a sign of good things to come! Weighing in at just 3.04oz and constructed from durable aluminum, Lenovo’s take on a MacBook Pro docking station is bound to impress if you’re after the perfect combination of portable and practical.
This docking station may not be offering up an army of ports for you to play with, but at the same time, there’s still a good number of ports included if you want to add a bit more flexibility to your setup. The docking station gives you 6 ports to expand the capabilities of your MacBook Pro with; on the side of the dock you’ll find a USB-C charging port, HDMI output, SD card reader, and 2 USB 3.0 ports, with the Gigabit Ethernet port on the front of the dock.
At just 4.57 inches long, 0.62 inches tall, and 1.84 inches wide, Lenovo’s docking station is both ideal as a stationary addition to your desk or as a ‘toss it into your bag and go’ solution to enjoying 4K UHD movies on the go or making sure that your devices can always be connected. While you can’t quite say that this MacBook Pro USB C dock can do it all, you can say that for any fan of minimalism, it does a great job.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The Elgato Thunderbolt 3 from Corsair easily earns a place amongst our list of the top 10 best MacBook Pro docking station options, despite having a slightly higher price tag than some of the alternative options out there. As you would expect from the reddot 2017 design winner, the Elgato Thunderbolt 3 MacBook Pro dock has a great design which allows you to connect all the devices that you need to your laptop with absolute ease. Despite what you may expect from such a versatile MacBook Pro docking station, the Elgato dock is very compact, nicely sleek, and beautifully finished so it’s not going to look out of place tucked away on your desk.
The wonders of the Elgato design allows you to connect your MacBook Pro and charge it at the same time – which is a novelty that certainly isn’t going to wear off soon after purchase. Not only can you use and charge your MacBook Pro with the dock, but you can connect up to 2 additional 4k resolution displays to turn any standard setup into one that will feel like it can do it all. While it’s up to you to decide how to make use of the Gigabit Ethernet port, audio output and input ports, DisplayPort, 2 Thunderbolt 3 ports, and 3 USB 3.0 ports, you certainly won’t be left wanting for port options.
If you’re a gamer, developer, or just enjoy being able to do multiple things at once on your computer, without compromise, then the Elgato Thunderbolt 3 dock is quite literally an award-winning choice.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The second addition of a Plugable dock to our best MacBook Pro dock list marks a slight change in design direction to our first three options. The Plugable USB C Mini Docking Station is very small at just 3.75” x 3.5” x 1.25” but doesn’t have the same slimline design as those that we’ve already covered; it’s also slightly heavier and has a matt black color. However, while it may not be the perfect choice for a highly portable dock, it certainly packs a punch!
Immensely versatile when it comes to expandability, very powerful with 85W of power for charging, and well-stocked with USB 3.0 type-A ports, this mini machine from Plugable has a lot going for it. Alongside the 4 USB 3.0 ports, there’s Gigabit Ethernet, HDMI output which has 4k support, USB-C, and audio input and output. The brilliant design of this small but capable dock means that you’ll never need to worry about problems with video output and charging again.
The MacBook Pro docking station is compatible with late 2016 MacBook Pros onwards, with further compatibility for many other systems that are utilizing the versatility of the Thunderbolt 3 port. This option is particularly great if you’re looking for an easily mountable MacBook Pro docking station with USB C compatibility, as the dock comes with a VESA mount included. Even if you’re not planning on mounting this dock, with all the cables tucked away at the back, it’ll still keep your desk nice and distraction-free.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
If the Plugable Mini Docking Station changed your view of what a MacBook Pro docking station could look like, then the Henge Docks Vertical Docking Station is really here to banish your preconceptions. This rather unique take on a MacBook Pro dock sticks true to the concept of a ‘dock’, as you quite literally dock your MacBook Pro in the station and then leave the dock to do all the hard work. Built-in management for the cables keeps everything tidy, the strong design ensures stability and durability, and the finish is incredibly elegant. Intrigued?
Well, the Henge Dock MacBook Pro station is exclusively for users of older 13-inch MacBook Pro models with retina displays, so you may not be able to experience this dock for yourself if you’re using a later model. The dock has all the cables pre-installed in the bottom of the docking station, which includes a USB 3.0 port, TRRS audio cables, and Mini DisplayPort – everything you need to create an amazing home cinema or a dual monitor setup!
Stylishly designed in silver, very neat, and beyond practical if you don’t want your MacBook Pro to be open when docked, there’s a lot to love about this alternative to the more common docking station designs. For anyone that hasn’t moved to a MacBook Pro with the Thunderbolt 3 ports yet, and who is after a MacBook Pro stand dock to become the heart of their media setup, this is a great choice; with the brand being well-known for their range of Henge Dock MacBook Pro station options, it’s also a safe choice.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The Bookendz docking station for 15-inch MacBook Pros is another product out to offer you something a little different when choosing your next (or first!) MacBook Pro docking station. Designed to sit underneath your MacBook Pro with the ports at the side, it couldn’t be simpler to get to grips with this docking station or get the most back from its functions. With the main bulk of the dock underneath the laptop, and just a small section to the side, this dock is brilliant for anyone after a minimalist solution to port problems.
The station is designed for older MacBook Pro models; particularly those without the latest Thunderbolt ports or retina display. While it may be for older models, the station offers a solution to many modern port problems. On the station you’ll discover a range of useful ports, including a large number of USB 3.0 ports, audio input and output ports, a Mini DisplayPort, and Gigabit Ethernet.
A key benefit of the unique design of the Bookendz docking station is the portability that it affords; you’ll no longer need to carry around everything for your MacBook Pro, just unplug it from the dock and away you go! By combining a laptop stand with a great selection of ports, Bookendz have created a highly practical product that’s great for anyone who wants more from their older MacBook Pro model.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
Not everyone has the luxury of owning a desk that has a never-ending amount of space. For those of us who have to think carefully about every addition to an already full desk, there’s still a MacBook Pro docking station out there that’s ideal! We’re pleased to introduce the seventh addition to our best dock list, and the first MacBook Pro vertical dock station that allows you to use your laptop when open, the StarTech DVI Dual Monitor Docking Station.
Designed by the space-saving experts over at StarTech, this docking station has you covered if you want the versatility of having a very large number of ports with the added practicality of not giving up too much precious desk space. Standing at a mighty 7-inches tall, StarTech’s docking station is adorned with an impressive five USB 3.0 type-A ports, two of which are on the front and offer fast charging. Alongside this goliath number of USB 3.0 type-A ports, there’s a DC input, mini-jack audio port, DVI-I port, DVI-D port, USB-B port, and a RJ-45 Network port.
The design of the dock allows you to connect two monitors at once, but there are even options for a triple monitor dock from StarTech if two monitors and your MacBook Pro just aren’t enough. While the lack of USB-C ports mean that this dock is for older Macbook models only, it’s a highly flexible choice if you haven’t taken the plunge and picked up a new MacBook Pro yet. If minimalism and a neat and tidy desk are top priorities for your dream work, gaming, or media setup, then you can’t go far wrong with StarTech’s versatile docking station.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The design variations just keep on coming! The A1398 MacBook Pro docking station from LandingZone for MacBook Pros with retina display, stands as testament to the range of choices that you have available when purchasing a new dock. This offering is a little pricey compared to some of the other docking stations on the market, and exclusive to the A1398 model, but just one glimpse at the large dock will tell you that you’re getting plenty of station for your hard-earned buck.
Unlike most of the MacBook Pro dock stations that we’re covered up to now, the LandingZone dock is designed to slot onto the back of your laptop and essentially doubles-up as a laptop stand at the same time – a win-win investment if your laptop is constantly overheating! Once secured in the docking station, your MacBook Pro can be locked in place with the security slot; whether you’re using the laptop alone or connected to up to two additional monitors, this means you can open and close the laptop without worry.
The ports included on the LandingZone MacBook Pro dock are extensive with 2 USB 2.0 ports, 3 USB 3.0 ports, a Mini DisplayPort, HDMI and headphone port. Due to the design of the docking station, some ports are still accessible on the MacBook Pro, such as the SDXC card slot and an additional USB 3.0 port. If you want a neat dock with all the wires tucked away at the back of your laptop, without having to rely on a separate MacBook Pro docking station, then this LandingZone dock is more than up to the job.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
Sleek and practical, our second MacBook Pro docking station with USB C from StarTech, brings great port coverage and a compact design to the table. The minimalist docking station is compatible with a range of laptops that come with the Thunderbolt 3 port, including the latest MacBook Pros, and HP and Dell laptops. Thanks to the combination of a DisplayPort and the Thunderbolt 3 port, nicely placed on the back of the station, you can use this modern dock to connect dual monitors.
From the USB-C and fast charge USB 3.0 ports on the front of the station to the RJ45 network, USB-A, dual 3.5mm jacks, DisplayPort, and dual Thunderbolt 3 ports on the back of the station, this StarTech dock is fully-equipped to maximize space on your desk and minimize port problems. 85w power charging means that your mobile will never run out of juice when you’re working and the inclusion of adaption cables for USB-C and Thunderbolt 3 to DisplayPort means that this docking station is even more practical.
Whether you’re looking to create a dual monitor gaming setup, want to clear-up space on your desk without compromising on what your setup is capable of, or you just want to charge your phone quickly, the StarTech Thunderbolt 3 Docking Station is a top-class choice. The sleek design also means that only a small amount of desk space will be eaten up by this versatile port solution!
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
As our list of the best MacBook Pro docking stations draws to a close, we have one last awesome MacBook Pro docking station to introduce you to, the Pillarr USB-C Docking Station. This small but powerful offering from Pillarr boasts an impressive 12 ports, with an even more impressive coverage of port types. A USB C dock for MacBook Pro, and a large range of other laptop types, Pillarr’s design is incredibly compact and fairly lightweight, despite what it’s capable of offering your MacBook Pro setup.
The ports include 3 USB 3.0 ports, a USB 3.1 type-C port, 2 3.5mm audio ports, an HDMI 4k UHD port, Gigabit Ethernet, and a nice selection of other legacy and latest ports. The vast range of port types enable you to hook this docking station up to your MacBook Pro, monitor or 4K smart TV with ease, and at the same time, import photos, connect your printer, or connect your speaker system.
One aspect that makes this docking station really stand out is the power pass-through that allows you to charge your mobile and laptop through the docking station, minimizing the wires on your desk even more. With the power delivery of 60W, you can keep your mobile and laptop at full power whilst still enjoying the enhanced port capabilities that this docking station has to offer.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
Now we’ve taken you on the wild ride through the latest and greatest MacBook Pro docking stations – at least in our opinion – it’s time for you to decide for yourself which docking station is the best option for you. Will it be the vertical Henge Dock MacBook Pro Station with its space-saving design? Or perhaps the slim and feature-packed StarTech Thunderbolt 3 Docking Station with its large number of ports and sleek design will be more fitting? You certainly have a nice selection to choose from!
Whatever dock you choose, we’re certain that the relief of easy wire management, reduced space consumption, and access to those legacy ports that you just can’t do without will continue to be a benefit for quite a while to come. At the very least, with a selection of legacy ports at your disposal, you’ll never have to worry about device compatibility!
W
hether you’re a start-up owner, a salesman or involved in some other kind of work where sales and leads are the bread and butter of your business, business cards are still incredibly useful and relevant. Even in this modern age of social media accounts, online conferences, webinars and email, the old-fashioned meet, greet and hand over the business card method of networking is still one of the most effective ways to get your name or the name of your company out there. But do you really need a business card holder? Won’t it just get in the way?
If how you and the people who work for you/at the same company as you look is crucial to how the business comes across, especially if you’re in a client or customer-facing role, does the same apply to your business card? Of course, it does! Sometimes business cards are handed out hastily and all that anyone that is given one will remember you by is that little rectangular sheet of laminated card or paper. You can see therefore, that it’s important that you give them the best impression of you, the business and what you can do for them. You want your business card to be professional and attractive. You want clients and customers to give the number noted on it a call or to check out the website or send you an email.
Now, you’ve probably got a sure-fire of a business card – it’s cool, matches the business and draws in leads. That is, when it is in good condition. If you’ve ever carried business cards in your wallet or pocket and tried using them when you meet with different people, you’ll know only too well that the major problem with keeping your cards in these kinds of places is that they get ruined very easily. Maybe not ruined completely, but the corners get frayed and curl up and often those random tears appear. Without proper protection, the wear and tear of even a fancy, well-laminated business card is never going to be very long. Especially if you are whipping them out left, right and center trying to generate leads, make friends and influence people.
That’s where business card holders and cases come into things. As well as protecting your precious marketing tools, they also provide you with a great way to transport a plentiful collection of them, so that you’re never out and about without one close to hand.
Now, in the following guide, from your friends here at Men’s Gear, we’re going to take a comprehensive look at some of the best business card holders and business card cases available on the market. There’s a total of 31 highlighted in this guide, so there’s definitely something for everyone. Before we get down to the business at hand, there’s some important questions we need to answer, that could help you to choose the right business card holder for your own particular needs.
This is a question that a lot of people have nowadays, because there’s a lot of people out there who don’t really see the value in even having business cards. It’s quite simple and been touched on in the introduction to this guide – you always want to put your best foot forward in business, and when networking, there’s nothing worse when you’re struggling to find a business card in your normal wallet or pocket. So, having a specific business card holder helps to eliminate all that unprofessional rummaging round.
What’s more, when you’ve got to rummage around in your bag to find something, it often comes at a price when you eventually find it. That is, your business cards are often looking a little worse for wear. With a business card holder, you obviously don’t have that problem as your precious cards are kept safe and free from damage or wear and tear.
Finally, one of the other main issues of not using a business card holder to store and carry your contact cards in, is the fact that there’s limited real estate in an ordinary wallet or bag. You’ve got space for cash, credit cards, ID and then whatever space is left, that’s often where you fit as many business cards in as you can. You don’t have to with a business card case or holder, as they’ve been purposely made to carry those particular kinds of cards.
Unless you don’t have any use for business cards in your profession, we’d highly recommend most people, particularly those in sales or anything where they’ve got generate leads and face clients and customers, should have a good quality, professional-looking and easy-to-use business card case or holder.
Now, this is another great question. However, it’s also one that does not really have a precise or standard answer. As there’s a multitude of business card holders and cases out there (remember, this list only scratches the surface with its whopping 31 products), there’s also a lot of variety when it comes to card capacity. Looking down our list though, you’ll find that many seem to have the capacity to hold 10 on average, with more expensive ones carrying more and less expensive ones carrying less.
That’s another rule of thumb that can’t actually be applied to all business card holders though – the “pay more for more” school of thinking. As we encountered when reviewing our wide and varied selection below, many that were more expensive had less space than cheaper models. In many situations, it was down to the more reputable and expensive branding or the other functions the case had or just the fact that it was made from seemingly higher quality materials.
The key takeaway from our answer to the above question is simply that there’s a business card case or holder for just about anyone, and if you need one for upwards of 50 cards or just need one that can hold 10, you’ll find what you’re looking for further down the page.
This is an interesting question, because how easy they are to use is one of the things that defines great business card holders and cases. The thing is though, what makes a business card holder easy to use and store cards in that’s going in your pocket will be different from one that’s going to sit on your desk.
Fortunately, there are actually some business card cases and holders made with these uses in mind. Whereas pocket business card holders are designed to be slick, streamlined and portable, desk business card holders may still be subtle, but usually consist of a display stand. That way, when customers or clients are sat at your desk, it’s easy for them to see your card and they have easy access that enables them to just take one and pop it in their own card holder or pocket.
As important, therefore, as the capacity and actual cost of a business card holder or case is, it’s also important to consider where you’re going to be using it most. The best pocket business card case, that keeps your cards safe and in good condition while you are on your daily commute or out and about meeting clients and chasing leads, may not actually be the best when you’re at the office.
Likewise, that fancy business card display holder is evidently not practical for taking out on the field with you. This is why also that you’ll find most businessmen invest in more than one business card holder.
Now that we’ve covered some of the essentials, let’s dig deep and take a look at some of the most awesome, practical and incredibly stylish business card holders on the market right now.
First up on our mega list of business card holders is the Bellroy Micro Sleeve. Although this is more a wallet, it can be adapted to use for business cards too and can even carry some cash. It’s made from top-grain leather that has been double-tanned following LWG gold-rated environmental guidelines, so that it ages better than leather that’s just been painted on the surface.
It is not incredibly big, but you can still fit between two and four cards into its external slots that can be easily accessed, and there’s additional space on the inside for a couple more.
As noted, this is really more of a wallet, but if you’ve got an important business meeting and just want to take a long enough business cards for all in attendance, then this will probably the do trick nicely and you can even carry some cash and a credit card in it, if necessary.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
Now on to this attractive number from Mont Blanc. This is an extremely well-made leather business card holder that has a very subtle carbon and woven look. As well as the internal gusset that has been specially made to hold business cards, there are 2 additional pockets that are ideal for bank cards and credit cards and one extra pocket that can be used in a variety of different ways.
Do you prefer something that is discreet and, dare we say it, plain looking? Then this Mont Blanc Westside Extreme card holder is perfect. The price tag is the only thing we think may put you off, but really you are paying for the quality material and Italian design and construction. Definitely one you may want to save for those meetings and shindigs with the higher fliers and the top—drawer clients and customers.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
Back with Bellroy again, though this time it is for the appropriately named card slip. The designer’s edition in the title refers to the same top-grain leather with LWG gold-rated tanning used in the other Bellroy card holder above. Therefore, this is another high-quality product made with high-quality materials. There’s space in the quick access slots for one to six cards and then a central section that’s revealed when it’s open that can hold additional cards and some cash, if necessary.
We reckon this is a great option if you often find yourself networking in the evening when you are off out for drinks or a meal, as it will fit neatly into your pocket with next to no hassle. The song and dance that can often be the case when you try to rummage around for that business card, you’re sure you put in your wallet last week is done away with something like this and we think it’s beautiful.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
LUMBER by Hacoa Card Case is the next on our list and benefits from the aesthetic qualities, like most other LUMBER products, of wood texture and grain. Therefore, this card case has a sophisticated style and appeal that will be eye-catching and a conversation starter without being too OTT for business situations.
What we really love about this card case is that it’s a fraction of the price of many on our list and can hold more cards too, between 16 and 18 to be precise. So, if you’re looking for a cost-effective option that is practical and stylish, this is the one for you. That is, if you can add it to your basket and check out before we’ve bought them all. Only kidding…or are we? That wooden finish does look extremely cool, after all.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
An even less expensive business card holder is this cracking one from Wisdompro (no, we’ve not heard of the company either), that is made from PU-leather, so if you have a conscience about such things, you can sleep soundly keeping your business cards in this. It has an ultra-slim design, but has space for 20 different cards and can be closed used a magnetic closure.
Along with business cards obviously, it can also be used for a wide array of other cards, including credit cards, bank cards, ID cards and even your driver’s license.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
Another low-priced offering on our list is this fashionable PU-leather business card from Y&G. As well as a synthetic leather construction, there is also metallic hardware that is stainless steel. This is therefore, another that’s ideal for people who prefer to avoid cruelty to animals in the manufacture of their accessories. It has a magnetic closure so it is relatively easy to open and close.
Space wise, it has the capacity to hold as many as 14 business cards or five to six credit cards, debit cards or other similarly sized and shaped cards. Considering it is under 10 bucks, we think it’s an excellent value product.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
Want something that looks a little swish and modern to hold your business cards, particularly if you’re in the tech industry or involved in IT in some way? You may want to check out this great business card holder from FAYEAH. It’s been designed to resemble a thumb-drive and even has a little button that you can slide along to push the cards you have inside it out for easy access.
Speaking of cards, there is space for between 10 and 18 business cards, depending on how thick or slimline they are. As you’re only able to slide one card out at a time, there’s no fumbling around trying to take just one out. The materials used in this card holder help to ensure it’s robust and durable – a high-quality stainless-steel with frosted aluminum.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
Regal by name, regal by nature. This business card holder from Samsill is a very smart accessory that any young upstart in the business world should invest in. It may look plain to some people, but we prefer to look at it as smart and sophisticated, with an understated elegance that speaks volumes about the type of professional you are and want to project yourself as.
Made from high quality leather with fine stitching, it features two pockets in the inside that have enough room for 25 business cards between them. Considering how compact it is, at just 4.25-inches by 2.25-inches, coupled with the number of cards it can hold, for its incredibly low-price tag, this is a great value purchase.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
Looking for even more bang for your buck in terms of business card capacity? Look no further than the MoKo business card holder. Made from PU leather, this is not only an incredibly stylish organizer for your business cards to help avoid fumbles and coming across as unprofessional when you try to give someone one of your cards and can’t find it. But it also has an utterly incredible card capacity, with enough space to fit a whopping 35 business cards. Next time you’re attending a sales convention or one for tech startups, be sure to take this and you’ll spread the word about you and your products, services or business in no time.
This has been made with pockets in mind and will fit very comfortably in one, but if you’d rather keep it inside your normal wallet, it’s small enough to fit inside that too. It has a nice magnetic closure, so you’ll always have a smooth time opening and closing it.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
The name sounds like one of those trendy ski wear and ski equipment manufacturers, but trust us, this is a great little accessory. Another genuinely low-priced business card holder, the Alpine Swiss genuine leather business card case is hard to pass on without seriously considering. Just look at the finished stitching around the edges and consider the fact that it holds a massive 50 business cards or 25 credit cards, in total. It consists of an ID window on the interior top-flap which can be used to keep your ID card, making it great for those trade and networking conventions and conferences. The main compartment features two interior pockets and one expandable flat compartment.
It’s very compact and discreet and looks more or less like an ordinary wallet at first glance. We think considering it’s just over 10 bucks, that this is a huge bargain.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
With all the black that’s featured so far in this guide, we thought it might be a nice change to feature this handsome brown Italian calfskin leather business card case. Aside from the color, another defining feature is the intriguing envelope design. Although it has a much smaller capacity than the last few that you’ve read through, with space for a maximum of 14 business cards and six credit cards, we still think for the price and the quality of the materials that this is a great buy.
The fact that this comes in its own smart and trendy presentation box means it could be a great gift. Do you have anyone in your life that’s just started a new business or needs to up their business networking game? This is a super present to get for them.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
Although more of a modern wallet design, we still think this would make an excellent business card holder. It’s amazingly lightweight and compact, with minimalism clearly at the forefront of the minds of the designers. Card-wise, it can hold up to eight business cards or bank and credit cards and also has another trick up its sleeve,
RFID is a form of technology we’re sure you’re familiar with, and if you’re not, it may be time that you educated yourself. Basically, RFID anti-scan technology protects your valuable credit, bank and store cards from being read by a sophisticated scanner that many modern criminals use to clone cards and get their hands on your personal details and sensitive financial information. So, as well as being a nifty and cool little way to carry around some cash, credit and bank cards and those all-important business cards, this also protects you from identity theft. All that for under 20 bucks.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
From HUSKK we’ve got another here that has RFID anti-scanning technology incorporated into it. This particular card holder has been constructed from medical-grade elastic and authentic leather. As such, it’s incredibly durable, but also very easy to use. The cards you use the most, or those crucial business cards, can be accessed smoothly and quickly using the elasticated pull-tab. Designed in the UK, it has been made to a high standard and is a stylish piece that you won’t be embarrassed to whip out when it’s time to swap contact details. There’s two sleeves that can be flexibly used for cash, ID, credit cards and of course, business cards, of which a maximum of 10 are likely to fit.
That may not seem like a lot, but considering you are paying less than 15 bucks for the privilege, it’s represents reasonably good value for money. Definitely one for use in the field.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
Need a business card case with a reasonable card capacity, but don’t fancy paying top dollar for it? Check out the Bolier business card holder. What can we say about this? Gaze upon its beauty to begin with, our friends, and appreciate the craftsmanship involved. It’s been constructed using high-quality leather and features top-notch hardware and hinges to provide a case that opens as smoothly and professionally as it looks.
We’re sure you are drooling with serious white-hot envy at the pic and description and we don’t blame you. Did we mention yet that it can hold a maximum of 30 business cards, depending on how thick they are? Oh well, looks like we just did! Seriously though, if you want to rock up to the next business meeting or conference in style, we recommend you give serious consideration with spending out the meagre price this is retailing for.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
We’re back with the classic wallet and business card holder specialists at Bellroy for this rather beautiful creation, the Bellroy Card Sleeve. This is an incredibly slim leather wallet that has been made so that it’s as lightweight and compact as it possibly can be. Because of this, it’s only really designed to hold a maximum of two to eight cards and dollar bills. However, if you’ve got a rather small networking function to attend and don’t want to be lumbered with carrying around your entire business card collection, this could be an ideal compromise.
It benefits from easy-access slots both to the back and front of the case and there’s a pull-tab functionality that helps you access your most used cards first. We think really for what it actually is, it could be considered a little bit on the expensive side. In its defense though, it is a Bellroy, and they’re an exceptionally good brand with a reputation for designing and manufacturing high-quality products and accessories.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
We’re no stranger to the classy and very functional products of Saddleback Leather Co., having featured some of their other products in previous buying guides and reviews. This slim business card holder more than lives up to the reputation Saddleback Leather has of producing fine and trendy accessories.
This has been lined with durable, but smooth and soft pigskin leather, which is thought to be even stronger than cow’s leather, and features high-quality stitching using polyester threading that is marine-grade and used in ships on their sails. It follows the basic design of a classic bi-fold wallet and has two slots at either side that can fit eight cards in each. Although this is not a massive amount, when you consider the branding, the top-rate materials and the finish, you can’t argue with the price.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
If you’re looking for something that’ll double up nicely as a functional day-to-day wallet and a business card holder, this aluminum RFID blocking card case from MOSIYEEF is probably right up your street. With PU leather covering most of it, this has a very robust and stylish design and features RFID technology to protect your cards from being cloned. There’s space for just one to six cards, depending on their thickness, but like we said, this is more a wallet-meets-business card holder rather than a straight-up business card case.
There’s also a cool stainless-steel clip for attaching easily accessible bills. In business, how you present yourself is just as important as what you say and do, so make sure you send out the right signals and give the right impression with this bad boy. Don’t be put off by the brand, that you’ve probably never heard of. Instead, be attracted to the functionality and the price you get that functionality for.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
Are you a little fed up with the tired old business card holders that don’t inspire? Check out this awesome piece of design and craft mastery that is the Moo Brushed Steel & Leather business card holder. This case is for people who want to stand out from the crowd. Imagine, pulling this cool card holder from your pocket when you are networking and generating leads. It’s quite the conversation piece with its professional, yet intriguing and stylish design.
Instead of overcomplicating things, Moo have actually managed to go to the other end of the scale and made this so easy to use that even Patrick Starfish would struggle to mess it up. Not that we’re really sure Patrick Starfish would need to mingle and network, but you never know… You can even flip it open and offer your cards to other delegates and representatives at functions and conferences, meaning you can shake their hand with your other or enjoy that free drink you were given when you entered the hall.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
Back again with our old friends at Mont Blanc, the Urban Spirit leather business card holder is, shall we say, one of the premium-grade products on our list. If by premium, you understand us to mean insanely expensive. All we can say is that, you’ll probably only want this if you’ve not got much need for a larger capacity business card holder, as there’s only space for around eight business cards or four credit cards.
Given that Mont Blanc are known for their quality products, we can understand the price tag, and there’s the classic business phrase of ‘got to spend money, to make money’. We’ll let you be the judge if the price tag is spending a little too much or not. We’d reserve this for use with top-drawer clients and customers, to project the right image and air of professionalism.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
Okay, so again, this is another great product that is admittedly more of a wallet than an actual business card holder, but given its price and the fact it’s made from genuine leather, means we couldn’t not mention it. Furthermore, there’s more than enough space for a reasonable amount of business cards. In fact, there’s four slots for passport cards, bank cards, debit cards, credit cards, one clear window slot for a driver’s license, work badge or other ID, a couple of slip pockets for business cards and one middle pocket for receipts, coupons, cash and other slim paper-based items.
The great thing is that, obviously, those slots can be used for whatever the hell you want. There’s really nothing, for the price it’s retailing at, to just slip as many business cards as you want into it. Although we’d reserve this for more informal networking scenarios, we still think it’s a great little accessory to have at your disposal.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
We’re now going to check out yet another product from HUSKK. This is incredibly affordable, while providing bags of functionality and flexibility in its simple, yet cool design. Despite the fact that it may look like it’s not, it’s genuinely made from nice quality leather. It’s true that it doesn’t have the largest capacity, but considering its price, we’d say it would be a big ask expecting more. 10 cards, we think, is still enough to carry around in a day-to-day style wallet or card holder.
For those situations, such as large trade conventions and industry conferences, we’d probably suggest you invest in a couple of these or one of the other great products listed on this page. For smaller, low-key networking scenarios, this should be more than fine though.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
Next on our list is this elegant and well-protected wallet that can double as a leather business card holder. It’s made from Dalvey’s special Caviar leather and has a slick, darkened-brown exterior and a much lighter, smoother interior. There’s also a printed fabric element on the interior too as a nice contrast to the exterior. There are six credit card slots, so it’s unlikely to fit a whole library of business cards.
That being said, this is a such a nice wallet, that we’d recommend investing in it as your everyday use wallet, and make use of it as a part time business card holder. Not all networking happens when you are in a room of 100 or so people with the same passions or career drives. Some networking happens on ordinary days, like Tuesdays. So, having this wallet as your go-to accessory for cards and money will still enable you to have enough cards to network with on a lowkey level.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
Another wallet that can double as a business card holder is this Wally Sleeve from Distil Union. This is a cool little holder, we have to admit. It’s been made using premium leather that has been specially approved and only comes from tanneries that have the Leather Workers Group certification. So, you know when you invest in this you are getting good quality for your money.
It’s got a very slimline and compact design that allows as many as six business cards and/or credit and bank cards to be stored comfortably in it. With the Distil Union’s very own Wally pull-tab that gives you quick and easy access to your cards and any dollar bills you may have tucked into it, while the FlexLock keeps everything safely and securely.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
Just when you thought we’d shown you all the classier products already, along comes this exquisite stainless-steel business card holder from Aspinall of London. This is an elegant and professional accessory that has a unique and aesthetically-appealing front panel made from Italian calf leather with a cognac-hue, while the interior has a luxurious felt lining that is secured in place by a special snap-tab closure system. The rest of the case is made from stainless steel and there’s so much else we could say.
At the price, the fact that it only has room for 10 business cards, that are standard-sized, means that some of you may be concerned about paying that much. However, we’d argue that this is a worthy purchase to make, thanks to the good reputation Aspinall of London has for designing and producing some great stuff. So, don’t be too quick to pass on this slim little beauty.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
LA-based Hammer Anvil are behind another of our more budget-friendly products. This minimalist wallet has been designed to avoid taking up too much room and just provides you with the adequate and efficient space you need. It’s made from authentic leather and has the main selling point of featuring Hammer Anvil’s very own anti-breach tech. This stops your credit cards and other financial organization’s cards from being cloned or anything sinister by high-tech criminals who try and use RF scanners on your wallet when you’re not looking.
It has a very traditional design, but, that doesn’t necessarily take anything away from it. Particularly if you’re more of a traditional kind of guy, you might actually like this kind of thing.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
Giorgio Fedon may not be a name that all of you are familiar with – if only you’d taken his business card! Seriously though, the guy is something of an Italian design legend. Giorgio has made a splash into the world of business cards with this holder. It’s got that luxury and classy feel that you often get from something from a fashion house, while remaining a very functional accessory piece.
Construction involves aluminum being folded and then covered in faux leather. There’s a fair bit of space inside one of these – and they also come in a range of striking colors, so don’t be shy when it comes to those meetups. There’s space for as many as 16 business cards, though it depends, as always on how thick they are. Although expensive, we really can’t fault the aesthetics and functionality of this accessory. Moo, in our opinion, are one of the best designers and manufacturers of card holders and wallets, and the addition of Fedon into the mix, just makes this one sublime product.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
If you’re looking for professional elegance with a modern tech industry look and feel, then check the Roco minimalist slim wallet out. First things first, although it’s another item that technically counts as a wallet, there’s space for a maximum of 20 business cards, so it can still be used when you’re networking. This is actually an updated version of a previous model.
Minimalist by name and by nature, this has been crafted using a flexible and patented silicone band to give it a compact and slimline feel, while the rest features high-grade aluminum. There’s room to store cards to the front of the holder and to the back too. This means, wherever you keep it, whether you’re a back pocketer or a front pocket assassin, you’ll always be able to offer your cards in a slick and smooth fashion.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
Now we’re talking, another bona fide, business card holder. From MaxGear, this polyurethane, synthetic leather holder features metallic elements to help give it shape and ensure that your precious business cards don’t move around when stored inside it.
For the incredibly low price this is retailing at, we were surprised just how many business cards it fits, with 20 being the maximum, depending as always on how thick they are. Aside from the capacity though, we absolutely love the magnetic double opening to give you easy and fuss-free access whichever way you pull it out when networking.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
Okay, so the name suggests that this is a credit card case, but this orange and stainless-steel product from Dalvey can obviously be flexibly used with business cards too, Dalvey are known for their innovative designs and has origins as a manufacturer of bagpipes of all things, and this updated version of a classic Dalvey design is no different.
It incorporates a toughened, but elegant mirror-polished stainless-steel body on the exterior with a softer silicone-rubber on the interior. Although it’s only got space for nine credit cards, more business cards may fit comfortably, depending of course on how slim or not they are. Given the price though, and the fact it has Dalvey’s branding and skill behind it, we think this is a winner.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
How about something that looks like crocodile skin a little? The Lethnic bi-fold leather business card holder wallet has been made using premium-quality cowhide leather, so you know it’s good quality. What we love though, is the fact it has been designed, in our opinion, to resemble the skin of a crocodile, with its scaly texture. It can hold as many as 10 credit cards and more than likely a little more business cards than that and has RFID tech built-in as most seem to these days.
This benefits from a very lightweight and streamlined design that means it won’t take up too much space in your pocket, compared to bulkier models. Ten is also a good enough number of business cards to have on your person, unless of course, you are going to a convention with 100s and 1000s in attendance.
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
You may be surprised, guys, to see that we’ve decided to finish our guide to the best business card holders and business card cases without a bang, but rather, a sublime and sophisticated product. The Hometown credit card or business card holder has a real elegance. Made from artificial leather, it has a simple button opening and an elegant design.
It may not be the all-singing, all-dancing holder that some others on this list appear to be, but this gets the job done, with a touch of class. Which is often all you really need a business card holder or case to do. It opens, closes, holds a reasonable number of cards for the price – what else do you really want it to do?
Check Product Price // Read More Reviews
We weren’t lying, were we? When we said there were 31 awesome business card holders and business card cases that would appeal to a wide variety of different people, we were telling the truth! From the highly functional, simply designed to the intricately designed and single function and everything in between, you really have been given just a snapshot of what’s actually out there. Trust us, it’s one of those markets where you could get lost at sea in a tide of intriguing and curiously designed business card holders that all look similar.
That’s why we put together this guide, to stop you getting lost at sea. We did most of the hard work, so that you don’t have to. Although there’s plenty more out there, and 31 is just scratching the surface, we don’t think you have to venture away from our selections.
At Men’s Gear, we take our responsibility to only provide the best in terms of value and function to our readers, which is why we are convinced that you’ll be able to find that perfect business card case or holder that suits your needs and requirements perfectly. It may even be that you end up investing in more than one, for different situations, and we wouldn’t blame you, as many of our team have been eyeing up a few of them too.
At the end of the day, it may be between having a business card holder, even a plain and not especially spectacular one, than none at all. Surely though, it makes more sense to get the one that’s going to propel you and help you come across as the professional businessman or salesman you know you are on the inside and that your colleagues know you are?
That, our friends, is why you need to choose wisely when picking out the best business card holders.
Just as you’d want to make a good first impression by dressing well for a first date with that hot girl you’ve always had a thing for, you want to always ensure you make a great first impression with clients and customers. So, take a good look through our selection before deciding on one (or more) and then choose the one that helps you secure those sales, leads or even investors.
We have faith in you!
